Instruction Manual: Hf/50 MHZ Transceiver

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER
i7600
FOREWORD SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Thank you for making the IC-7600 your radio of The transceiver comes with the following accessories.
choice. We hope you agree with Icom’s philosophy of Qty.
“technology first.” Many hours of research and devel- q Hand microphone ............................................ 1
opment went into the design of your IC-7600. w DC power cable ............................................... 1
e Spare fuse (ATC 5 A) ....................................... 1
FEATURES r Spare fuse (ATC 30 A) ..................................... 2
❍ Ultimate receiver performance: third-order inter- t 6.35 (d) mm plug................................................ 1
cept (IP3) of +30 dBm (HF bands only) q w
❍ Built-in Baudot RTTY and PSK modulator/demodu-
lator and direct PC keyboard connection capability
for RTTY and PSK operations without a PC
❍ High resolution spectrum scope— center frequency
and fixed frequency modes, plus mini-scope dis-
plays e r
❍ USB connectors on front and rear panels
❍ Large LCD with LED backlight
t
IMPORTANT
READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CAREFULLY before attempting to operate the FCC INFORMATION
transceiver.
• FOR CLASS B UNINTENTIONAL RADIATORS:
SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL. This This equipment has been tested and found to comply
manual contains important safety and operating with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
instructions for the IC-7600. part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equip-
ment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guar-
WORD DEFINITION
antee that interference will not occur in a particular
Personal death, serious injur y or an
RDANGER installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
explosion may occur.
interference to radio or television reception, which can
Personal injury, fire hazard or electric
RWARNING be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
shock may occur.
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer-
CAUTION Equipment damage may occur. ence by one or more of the following measures:
If disregarded, inconvenience only. No risk
NOTE of personal injury, fire or electric shock. • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
Spurious signals may be received near the following
• C onnect the equipment into an outlet on a
frequencies. These are made in the internal circuit
circuit different from that to which the receiver is
and does not indicate a transceiver malfunction.
connected.
10.4923MHz, 24.576MHz
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered trademarks of
Icom Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the United States, the United
Kingdom, Germany, France, Spain, Russia and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other coun-
tries.
All other products or brands are registered trademarks or trade-
marks of their respective holders.

PRECAUTIONS
R WARNING HIGH RF VOLTAGE! NEVER DO NOT use chemical agents such as benzine
attach an antenna or internal antenna connector or alcohol when cleaning the IC-7600, as they can
during transmission. This may result in an electrical damage the transceiver’s surfaces.
shock or burn.
DO NOT push the PTT switch when you don’t actu-
R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver ally desire to transmit.
with a headset or other audio accessories at high
volume levels. Hearing experts advise against continu- DO NOT use or place the transceiver in areas with
ous high volume operation. If you experience a ringing temperatures below ±0°C (+32°F) or above +50°C
in your ears, reduce the volume or discontinue use. (+122°F).
R WARNING! Immediately turn the transceiver DO NOT place the transceiver in excessively dusty 1
power OFF and remove the power cable if it emits an environments or in direct sunlight.
abnormal odor, sound or smoke. Contact your Icom
dealer or distributor for advice.
DO NOT place the transceiver against walls or 2
putting anything on top of the transceiver. This may
CAUTION! NEVER put the transceiver in any overheat the transceiver. 3
unstable place (such as on a slanted surface or
vibrated place). This may cause injury and/or damage
Always place unit in a secure place to avoid inadver-
tent use by children.
4
to the transceiver.
BE CAREFUL! If you use a linear amplifier, set the 5
CAUTION! NEVER change the internal settings of transceiver’s RF output power to less than the linear
the transceiver. This may reduce transceiver perfor-
mance and/or damage to the transceiver.
amplifier’s maximum input level, otherwise, the linear 6
amplifier will be damaged.
In particular, incorrect settings for transmitter circuits, BE CAREFUL! The rear panel will become hot when
7
such as output power, idling current, etc., might
damage the expensive final devices.
operating the transceiver continuously for long peri-
ods of time.
8
The transceiver warranty does not cover any prob-
lems caused by unauthorized internal adjustment.
Use Icom microphones only (supplied or optional). 9
Other manufacturers’ microphones have different pin
CAUTION! NEVER apply AC power to the assignments, and connection to the IC-7600 may 10
[DC13.8V] socket on the transceiver rear panel. This damage the transceiver or microphone.
could cause a fire or damage the transceiver. The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections
11
that appear as small dark or light spots. This is not a
CAUTION! NEVER apply more than 16 V DC,
such as a 24 V battery, to the [DC13.8V] socket on malfunction or defect, but a normal characteristic of 12
LCD displays.
the transceiver rear panel. This could cause a fire or
damage the transceiver.
13
During maritime mobile operation, keep the trans-
CAUTION! NEVER let metal, wire or other objects ceiver and microphone as far away as possible from 14
protrude into the transceiver or into connectors on the the magnetic navigation compass to prevent errone-
rear panel. This may result in an electric shock. ous indications. 15
CAUTION! NEVER block any cooling vents on Turn the transceiver power OFF and/or disconnect
the top, rear or bottom of the transceiver. the DC power cable when you will not use the trans- 16
ceiver for long period of time.
CAUTION! NEVER expose the transceiver to 17
rain, snow or any liquids. For U.S.A. only
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this device, 18
CAUTION! NEVER install the transceiver in a not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could void your
place without adequate ventilation. Heat dissipation
may be reduced, and the transceiver may be damaged.
authority to operate this device under FCC regula- 19
tions.
CAUTION! NEVER operate or touch the trans- 20
ceiver with wet hands. This may result in an electric
shock or damage to the transceiver. 21
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD............................................................... i 3 BASIC OPERATION...................................... 25−37
IMPORTANT................................................................ i ■ Before first applying power............................... 25
EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS............................................. i ■ Applying power (CPU resetting)....................... 25
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES....................................... i ■ Selecting VFO/memory mode.......................... 26
FCC INFORMATION................................................... i ■ Main/Sub band selection.................................. 26
PRECAUTIONS.......................................................... ii D Main/Sub band switching............................. 26
TABLE OF CONTENTS............................................ iii D Main/Sub band equalization........................ 26
■ Selecting an operating band............................ 27
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION................................... 1−15
D Using the band stacking registers................ 27
■ Front panel......................................................... 1
■ Frequency setting............................................. 28
■ Rear panel........................................................ 11
D Tuning with the main dial.............................. 28
■ LCD display...................................................... 13
D Direct frequency entry with the keypad........ 28
■ Screen menu arrangement.............................. 15
D About the 5 MHz band operation
2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS......... 16−24 (USA version only)....................................... 29
■ Unpacking........................................................ 16 D Quick tuning step......................................... 29
■ Selecting a location.......................................... 16 D Selecting “kHz” step..................................... 29
■ Grounding........................................................ 16 D Selecting 1 Hz step...................................... 30
■ Antenna connection......................................... 16 D Auto tuning step function............................. 30
■ Required connections...................................... 17 D 1⁄4 tuning step function................................ 30
D Front panel................................................... 17 D Band edge warning beep............................. 31
D Rear panel................................................... 17 ■ Operating mode selection................................ 32
■ Advanced connections..................................... 18 ■ Squelch and receive (RF) sensitivity................ 33
D Front panel................................................... 18 ■ Volume setting.................................................. 34
D Rear panel— 1............................................. 18 ■ Meter display selection..................................... 34
D Rear panel— 2............................................. 19 D Multi-function digital meter........................... 34
■ USB connection............................................... 19 D Meter type selection..................................... 35
■ Power supply connections................................ 20 ■ Voice synthesizer operation.............................. 35
■ External antenna tuner connection.................. 20 ■ Basic transmit operation................................... 36
■ Linear amplifier connections............................ 21 D Transmitting.................................................. 36
D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO.................... 21 D Microphone gain adjustment........................ 36
D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier....... 21 D Drive gain adjustment.................................. 37
■ Transverter jack information............................. 22
4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT........................... 38−89
■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections................ 22
■ Functions for CW operation.............................. 38
D FSK operation—
D About CW reverse mode.............................. 38
when connecting to [ACC 1]........................ 22
D About CW pitch control................................ 38
D AFSK operation........................................... 22
D CW sidetone function................................... 38
D When connecting to the [USB] connector.... 22
D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation............... 39
■ Microphone connector information................... 23
■ Electronic keyer functions................................ 40
■ Microphones..................................................... 23
D Memory keyer screen.................................. 41
D HM-36.......................................................... 23
D Editing a memory keyer............................... 42
D SM-50 (Option)............................................ 23
D Contest number set mode........................... 43
■ Accessory socket information.......................... 24
D Keyer set mode............................................ 44
iii
■ RTTY (FSK) operation...................................... 46 ■ Dualwatch operation........................................ 79
D About RTTY reverse mode.......................... 47 ■ Noise blanker................................................... 81
D Twin peak filter............................................. 47 D NB set mode................................................ 81
D Functions of the RTTY decoder display........ 48 ■ Noise reduction................................................ 82
D Setting the decoder threshold level.............. 48 ■ Dial lock function.............................................. 82
D RTTY memory transmission........................ 49 ■ Notch function.................................................. 83
D Automatic transmission/reception setting.... 49 ■ Auto tune function............................................ 83
D Editing RTTY memory................................. 50 ■ VOX function..................................................... 84
D RTTY decode set mode............................... 51 D Using the VOX function................................ 84
D Data saving.................................................. 53 D Adjusting the VOX function.......................... 84 1
■ PSK operation.................................................. 54 ■ Break-in function.............................................. 85
D About BPSK and QPSK modes................... 55 D Semi break-in operation............................... 85 2
D Functions of the PSK decoder display......... 56 D Full break-in operation................................. 85
D Setting the decoder threshold level.............. 56 ■ Speech compressor......................................... 86 3
D PSK memory transmission.......................... 57 ■ Transmit filter width setting............................... 86
D Automatic transmission/reception setting.... 57 ■ ∂TX function.................................................... 87
4
D Editing PSK memory................................... 58
D PSK decode set mode................................. 59
D ∂TX monitor function................................... 87
■ Monitor function................................................ 87
5
D Data saving.................................................. 61 ■ Split frequency operation................................. 88 6
■ Repeater operation.......................................... 62 ■ Quick split function........................................... 89
D Repeater access tone frequency setting..... 62 D Split lock function......................................... 89 7
■ Tone squelch operation.................................... 63
■ Data mode (AFSK) operation........................... 64
5 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS................ 90−98 8
■ About digital voice recorder.............................. 90
■ Spectrum scope screen................................... 65
D Center mode................................................ 65
■ Recording a received audio............................. 91 9
D Basic recording............................................ 91
D Fixed mode.................................................. 66
D Mini scope screen display............................ 67
D One-touch recording.................................... 91 10
■ Playing the recorded audio.............................. 92
D Scope set mode........................................... 67
D Basic playing................................................ 92 11
■ Preamplifier...................................................... 72
D One-touch playing........................................ 92
■ Attenuator......................................................... 72
■ Protect the recorded contents.......................... 93
12
■ RIT function...................................................... 73
D RIT monitor function.................................... 73
■ Erasing the recorded contents......................... 93
■ Recording a message for transmit................... 94
13
■ AGC function.................................................... 74
D Selecting the preset value........................... 74
D Recording.................................................... 94 14
D Confirming a message for transmit.............. 94
D Setting the AGC time constant preset value... 74
■ Twin PBT operation.......................................... 75
■ Programming a memory name......................... 95 15
■ Sending a recorded message.......................... 96
■ IF filter selection............................................... 76
D IF filter selection........................................... 76
D Transmit level setting.................................... 96 16
■ Voice set mode................................................. 97
D Filter passband width setting
■ Saving a voice message 17
(except the FM mode).................................. 76
into the USB-Memory....................................... 98
D Roofing filter selection................................. 77
D Saving the received audio memory............. 98
18
D DSP filter shape........................................... 77
D Filter shape set mode.................................. 78
D Saving the TX memory................................ 98 19
20
21
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6 MEMORY OPERATION............................... 99−104 9 CLOCK AND TIMERS............................... 115−117
■ Memory channels............................................. 99 ■ Clock set mode.............................................. 115
■ Memory channel selection............................... 99 ■ Daily timer setting........................................... 116
D Using the [∫]/[√] keys................................. 99 ■ Setting sleep timer......................................... 117
D Using the keypad......................................... 99 ■ Timer operation.............................................. 117
■ Memory list screen......................................... 100
10 SET MODE................................................ 118−143
D Selecting a memory channel
■ Set mode description..................................... 118
using the memory list screen..................... 100
D Set mode operation................................... 118
D Confirming programmed memory channels... 100
D Screen arrangement.................................. 119
■ Memory channel programming...................... 101
■ Level set mode............................................... 120
D Programming in the VFO mode................. 101
■ ACC set mode................................................ 124
D Programming in the memory mode........... 101
■ Display set mode............................................ 126
■ Frequency transfers....................................... 102
■ Others set mode............................................. 128
D Transferring in the VFO mode................... 102
■ USB-Memory set menu.................................. 136
D Transferring in the memory mode.............. 102
D USB-Memory set screen arrangement...... 136
■ Memory names.............................................. 103
■ File loading..................................................... 137
D Editing (programming) memory names..... 103
D Load option set mode................................ 138
■ Memory clearing............................................. 103
■ File saving...................................................... 139
■ Memo pads.................................................... 104
D Save option set mode................................ 140
D Writing frequencies and operating modes
■ Changing a file name..................................... 141
into memo pads......................................... 104
■ Deleting a file ................................................ 142
D Calling up a frequency and operating mode
■ Unmounting USB-Memory............................. 142
from a memo pad...................................... 104
■ Formatting the USB-Memory......................... 143
7 SCANS...................................................... 105−111
11 MAINTENANCE........................................ 144−150
■ Scan types..................................................... 105
■ Troubleshooting.............................................. 144
■ Preparation..................................................... 105
D Transceiver power...................................... 144
■ Scan set mode............................................... 106
D Transmit and receive.................................. 144
■ Programmed scan operation.......................... 107
D Scanning.................................................... 145
■ ∂F scan operation.......................................... 107
D Display....................................................... 145
■ Fine programmed scan/Fine ∂F scan............ 108
D Format USB-Memory................................. 145
■ Memory scan operation.................................. 109
■ Main dial brake adjustment............................ 145
■ Select memory scan operation....................... 109
■ SWR reading.................................................. 146
■ Setting select memory channels.................... 110
■ Screen type and font selections..................... 146
D Setting in scan screen............................... 110
■ Frequency calibration (approximate).............. 147
D Setting in memory list screen.................... 110
■ Opening the transceiver’s case...................... 148
D Erasing the select scan setting.................. 110
■ Clock backup battery replacement................. 148
■ Tone scan....................................................... 111
■ Fuse replacement.......................................... 149
8 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION.............. 112−114 D DC power cable fuse replacement............. 149
■ Automatic antenna selection.......................... 112 D Circuitry fuse replacement......................... 149
■ Antenna tuner operation................................. 113 ■ Resetting the CPU......................................... 149
D Tuner operation.......................................... 113 ■ About protection displays............................... 150
D Manual tuning............................................ 113 ■ Screen saver function..................................... 150
■ Optional external tuner operation................... 114

12 CONTROL COMMAND............................. 151−159
■ Remote jack (CI-V) information...................... 151
D CI-V connection example........................... 151
D Data format................................................ 151
D Command table......................................... 152
D Data content description............................ 157
13 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS........... 160−161

■ General.......................................................... 160
■ Transmitter...................................................... 160
■ Receiver......................................................... 160
1
■ Antenna tuner................................................. 160 2
■ Options........................................................... 161
14 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE.................... 162−165

3
■ General.......................................................... 162
4
■ Caution........................................................... 162
■ Preparation..................................................... 163 5
D Firmware.................................................... 163
D File downloading........................................ 163 6
■ Firmware update............................................ 164
7
15 CE.............................................................. 166−167
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
vi
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
■ Front panel
q
TIMER TX RX SPLIT LOCK 1.8 3.5 7 TWIN-PBT

HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER SPLIT 1 2 3
POWER 10 14 18
4 5 6
DUAL
w TRANSMIT TUNER MONITOR

WATCH 21
GENE
7 24
50
8 28 9
F-INP ENT
PHONES BAL NR CHANGE 0
e MAIN
/SUB
MP-W
MW
MP-R
VFO/MEMO
PBT-CLR
NOTCH
NOTCH APF/TPF
CW PITCH
ELEC-KEY
r NB NR
XFC TS
AF RF/SQL
t RIT Ӡ TX CLEAR
MIC RIT/Ӡ TX
AUTO
F- 1 F- 2 F- 3 F- 4 F- 5 F- 6 TUNE
y SPEECH
SSB CW RTTY/PSK AM/FM FILTER EXIT/SET REC PLAY LOCK
MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED VOICE MEMORY
u i o !0
q POWER SWITCH [POWER•TIMER] (p. 30) r ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [ELEC-KEY]

When the transceiver’s power is OFF: Accepts a paddle to activate the internal electronic
➥ Push to turn the transceiver power ON. keyer for CW operation. (p. 17)
• Turn the optional DC power supply ON in advance. • You can select the internal electronic keyer, bug-key
• The indicator on this switch lights green when pow- or straight key operation in the keyer set mode screen.
ered ON. (p. 44)
When the transceiver’s power is ON: • A straight key jack is located on the rear panel. See
➥ Push the switch momentarily to toggle the timer [KEY] on p. 12.
function ON or OFF. (p. 117) • Keyer polarity (dot and dash) can be reversed in the
• The timer indicator appears when the timer function keyer set mode screen. (p. 45)
is ON. (If the transceiver’s power is OFF, the indicator • A 4-channel memory keyer is available for your conve-
on this switch lights red.) nience. (p. 41)
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the transceiver (dot)
power OFF. (com)
(dash)
w TRANSMIT SWITCH [TRANSMIT]
Selects transmit or receive.
• The [TX] indicator lights red while transmitting and the t USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTOR
[RX] indicator lights green when the squelch is open. (A type) [USB] (A) (p. 19)
➥ Insert a USB-Memory* for both reading and stor-
e HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES] ing a wide variety of the transceiver’s information
Accepts standard stereo headphones (impedance: and data.
8 to 16 ø). • The indicator above the connector lights or blinks
• Output power: 5 mW with an 8 ø load. when the transceiver reads or writes to the memory
• When headphones are connected, the internal speaker data.
or connected external speaker is disabled. • An unmount operation should be performed before
removing the USB-Memory* (p.142).
➥ Connects a PC keyboard for RTTY and PSK op-
erations, etc.
• Only USB keyboards* are supported.
*: A USB-Memory and USB keyboard are not supplied
by Icom.

PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
y MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC] !0 RF GAIN CONTROL/SQUELCH CONTROL

Accepts the supplied or an optional microphone. [RF/SQL] (outer control; p. 33)
• See p. 161 for appropriate microphones. Adjusts the RF gain and squelch threshold level.
• See p. 23 for microphone connector information. The squelch removes noise output from the speaker
(closed condition) when no signal is received.
u MIC GAIN CONTROL [MIC GAIN] (p. 36)
Adjusts the microphone gain.
• The transmit audio tone in the SSB, AM and FM modes
can be adjusted independently in the level set mode.
(p. 121)
✔ How to set the microphone gain.
Set the [MIC GAIN] control so that the ALC meter • The squelch is particularly effective for FM. It is also
available for other modes.
1
swings within the ALC range during normal voice
• The 12 to 1 o’clock position is recommended for the
level transmission, in the SSB or AM modes. (The most effective use of the [RF/SQL] control. 2
ALC meter must be selected.) • T he control can be set as ‘Auto’ (RF gain control in
Increases SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch control in AM and 3
FM) or squelch control (RF gain is fixed at maximum)
in the set mode as follows. (p. 128)
4
Push Decreases SET MODE SETTING
MODE
AUTO SQL RF GAIN + SQL 5
SSB, CW
Recommended level for
an Icom microphone
RTTY/PSK
RF GAIN SQL RF GAIN + SQL
6
AM, FM SQL SQL RF GAIN + SQL
7
MIC GAIN • When setting as an RF gain/squelch control
Noise squelch (FM mode) 8
Squelch is Recommended level
i AF CONTROL [AF] (inner control; p. 34)
Varies the audio output level of the speaker or
open.
Maximum 9
RF gain
headphones.
RF gain
adjustable
10
Increases S-meter
range squelch
11
• When functioning as an RF gain control 12
Decreases (Squelch is fixed open; SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK only)
13
Maximum
o RF POWER CONTROL [RF POWER] (p. 36)
Continuously varies the RF output power from a
Adjustable
range
RF gain 14
minimum of 2 W* to a maximum of 100 W*.
*AM mode: 1 W to 30 W
Minimum RF gain 15
Increases
max. 100 W • When functioning as a squelch control
(RF gain is fixed at maximum.)
16
(30 W for AM)
Decreases
Push min. 2 W
Noise squelch (FM mode)
17
(1 W for AM) Noise squelch
S-meter squelch
threshold
(FM mode)
threshold 18
Squelch is
open.
S-meter
squelch
19
Shallow Deep 20
While rotating the RF gain control, noise may be 21
heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not
indicate an equipment malfunction.

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
■ Front panel (continued)
!3

POWER 10 14 18
4 5 6
DUAL
WATCH 21 24 28
TRANSMIT 7 8 9
TUNER MONITOR
GENE 50 F-INP ENT
MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF

MAIN
/SUB
M.SCOPE MW VFO/MEMO NOTCH CW PITCH
ELEC-KEY
XFC TS
NB NR
AF RF/SQL
RIT Ӡ TX CLEAR
MIC RIT/Ӡ TX
AUTO
F- 1 F- 2 F- 3 F- 4 F- 5 F- 6 TUNE
SPEECH
!1 !2
!1 BREAK-IN DELAY CONTROL !3 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCHES

[BK-IN DELAY] (p. 85) Push to select the functions indicated in the LCD
Adjusts the transmit-to-receive switching delay display to the right of these switches.
time for CW semi-break-in operations. • Functions vary, depending on the operating condition.
Long delay for
slow speed MF1 (MULTI-FUNCTION 1 SWITCH)
Short delay for keying (13 dots) ANT SWITCH (ANT)
Push high speed ➥ S elects the antenna connector be-
keying (2 dots) tween ANT1 and ANT2 when pushed.
(p. 112)
!2 ELECTRONIC CW KEYER SPEED CONTROL ➥ Turns the [RX ANT] (receive antenna)
[KEY SPEED] (p. 85) ON or OFF when pushed and held for
Adjusts keying speed for the internal electronic CW 1 sec.
keyer from 6 wpm (min.) to 48 wpm (max.). • When the receive antenna is activated,
Fast the antenna connected to [ANT1] or
(48 wpm) [ANT2] is used for transmitting only.
Push Slow When a transverter is in use, [ANT]

(6 wpm) does not function and ‘TRV’ appears.
MF2 (MULTI-FUNCTION 2 SWITCH)

METER SWITCH (METER) (p. 34)
➥ Selects the RF power (Po), SWR, ALC,
COMP, Vd or Id metering functions
during transmit.
➥ S witches the multi-function digital
meter ON or OFF when pushed and
held for 1 sec.

PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
MF3 (MULTI-FUNCTION 3 SWITCH) MF6 (MULTI-FUNCTION 6 SWITCH)

P.AMP SWITCH (P.AMP) (p. 72) VOX SWITCH (VOX) (p. 84)
➥ Selects one of 2 receive RF preamps ➥ P ush to turn the VOX function ON
or bypasses them. or OFF during the SSB, AM and FM
• “P. AMP1” activates a 10 dB preamp. mode operation.
• “P. AMP2” activates a 16 dB high-gain ➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to select the
preamp. VOX set mode.
• “P. AMP OFF” can also be selected.
➥ Turns the preamp function OFF when ✔ What is the VOX function?
pushed and held for 1 sec. The VOX function (voice operated transmission)
activates transmission without pushing the trans-
✔ What is the preamp?
The preamp amplifies signals in the front end to im-
mit switch or PTT switch when you speak into the 1
microphone; then automatically returns to receive
prove the S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select “P. AMP1”
or “P. AMP2” when receiving weak signals.
when you stop speaking. 2
BK-IN SWITCH (BK-IN) (p. 85) 3
➥ Selects semi break-in, full break-in op-
ATT SWITCH (ATT) (p. 72)
➥ Selects a 6 dB, 12 dB or 18 dB attenu-
eration in the CW mode, or turns the
break-in operation OFF when pushed.
4
ator when pushed.
• “ATT OFF” can also be selected. ✔ What is the break-in function? 5
➥ Turns the attenuator function OFF The break-in function switches transmit and receive
when pushed and held for 1 sec. with CW keying. Full break-in function (QSK), you 6
✔ What is the attenuator? can monitor the receive signal during keying.
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being 7
distorted when very strong signals are near it, or MF7 (MULTI-FUNCTION 7 SWITCH)
when very strong electromagnetic fields, such as COMP SWITCH (COMP) (p. 86) 8
from a broadcasting station, are near your location. ➥ Turns the speech compressor ON or
OFF in the SSB mode. 9
➥ Selects the compression between nar-
AGC SWITCH (AGC) (p. 74)
row, mid or wide when pushed and 10
held for 1 sec.
➥ Activates and selects a fast, middle
or slow AGC time constant when ✔ What is the speech compressor? 11
pushed. The speech compressor compresses the transmit-
• In the FM mode, only “FAST” is avail- ter audio input to increase the average audio output 12
able. level, in order to increase talk power. This function is
➥ S elects the AGC set mode when effective for long-distance communication, or when 13
pushed and held for 1 sec. propagation conditions are poor.
he AGC time constant can be set be-

T 1⁄4 SWITCH (1⁄4) (p. 30)
14
tween 0.1 and 8.0 sec. (depending on
the mode), or turned OFF. When the
➥ Turns the 1⁄4 speed tuning function ON
or OFF in the SSB data, CW, RTTY
15
AGC is OFF, the S-meter does not
function.
and PSK modes.
• The 1⁄4 function sets the dial speed to 16
1⁄4 of it’s normal speed for fine tuning.
✔ What is the AGC?
TONE SWITCH (TONE) (pgs. 62, 63)
17
The AGC controls the receiver gain to produce a
constant audio output level, even when the received
signal strength varies dramatically. Select “FAST”
➥ Switches between the tone encoder,
tone squelch function and no-tone op-
18
eration when pushed in the FM mode.
for tuning and then select “MID” or “SLOW,” depend-
ing on the receiving condition. ➥ S elects the tone set mode when 19
pushed and held for 1 sec. in the FM
mode. 20
21

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
!7 !6 !5 !4

POWER 10 14 18
4 5 6
DUAL
WATCH 21 24 28
TRANSMIT 7 8 9
TUNER MONITOR
GENE 50 F-INP ENT

MAIN
!8
/SUB
ELEC-KEY
XFC TS
!9 NB
AF
NR
RF/SQL
RIT Ӡ TX CLEAR
MIC RIT/Ӡ TX
AUTO
F- 1 F- 2 F- 3 F- 4 F- 5 F- 6 TUNE
SPEECH
@0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 @8 @9
!4 NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH [NR] (p. 82) !8 BALANCE CONTROL [BAL] (inner control; p. 79)
Push to switch DSP noise reduction ON or OFF. Adjusts the audio output balance between main
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the func- and sub readout frequencies while in dualwatch.
tion is activated. Increases sub
readout gain
!5 NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL [NR]
(outer control; p. 82)
Adjusts the DSP noise reduction level when the
Increases main
noise reduction function is in use. Set for maximum readout gain
readability.
• To use this control, push [NR] (!4) in advance.
Increases !9 NOISE BLANKER SWITCH [NB] (p. 81)
➥ S witches the noise blanker ON or OFF when
pushed. The noise blanker reduces pulse-type
noise such as that generated by automobile ig-
Decreases
nition systems. This function cannot be used in
the FM mode, and is not effective for non-pulse-
!6 MONITOR SWITCH [MONITOR] (p. 87) type noise.
Monitors your transmitted IF signal. • The indicator on this switch lights green while the
• The CW sidetone functions regardless of the [MONI- function is activated.
TOR] switch setting in the CW mode. ➥ Selects the noise blanker level set mode when
• The indicator on this switch lights green while the func- pushed and held for 1 sec.
tion is activated.
@0 LCD FUNCTION SWITCHES [F-1] to [F-6]
!7 ANTENNA TUNER SWITCH [TUNER] (p. 113) Push to select the function indicated in the LCD
➥ Turns the internal antenna tuner ON or OFF (by- display above these switches.
pass) when pushed momentarily. • Functions vary, depending on the operating condition.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the
tuner is turned ON, goes off when tuner is turned
OFF (bypassed).
➥ Allows you to tune the antenna tuner manually,
when pushed and held for 1 sec.
• The indicator on this switch blinks red during manual
tuning.
• When the tuner cannot tune the antenna, the tuning
circuit is automatically bypassed after 20 sec.

PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
@1 MODE SWITCHES @5 VOICE MEMORY PLAYBACK SWITCH [PLAY]

Selects the desired mode. (p. 32) (p. 92)
• Announces the selected mode via the speech synthe- ➥ Push to playback the selected voice memory in the
sizer. (p. 35) RX memory screen for the preset time period.
• When the RX memory screen is not displayed, the
[SSB] previously recorded audio is played back for the pre-
➥ Selects the USB and LSB modes alternately set time period.
when pushed. ➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to playback all of the se-
➥ Selects the SSB data mode (USB-D, LSB-D) when lected voice memory in the RX memory screen.
pushed and held for 1 sec. in the SSB mode. • When the RX memory screen is not displayed, all of
• In the SSB data mode, push to return to the SSB the previously recorded audio is played back.
mode.
@6 AUTOMATIC TUNING SWITCH [AUTO TUNE]
1
➥ Switches D1, D2 and D3 when pushed and held
for 1 sec. in the SSB data mode. (p. 83)
Turns the automatic tuning function ON or OFF in
2
[CW]
Alternately selects the CW and CW-R (CW reverse)
the CW and AM modes.
3
modes when pushed. IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a sig- 4
[RTTY/PSK] nal with interference, the automatic tuning func-
➥ Alternately selects the RTTY and PSK modes
when pushed.
tion may tune the receiver to an undesired signal. 5
➥ Switches the RTTY and RTTY-R (RTTY reverse)
mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. in the @7 MAIN DIAL 6
Changes the displayed frequency, selects the set
RTTY mode.
➥ Switches the PSK and PSK-R (PSK reverse) mode mode setting, etc. 7
when pushed and held for 1 sec. in PSK mode.
@8 SPEECH/LOCK SWITCH [SPEECH/LOCK] 8
[AM/FM] ➥ Push to audibly announce the S-meter display,
➥ Alternately selects the AM and FM modes. the displayed frequency and the operating mode.
(p. 35)
9
➥ Selects the AM or FM data mode (AM-D/FM-D)
when pushed and held for 1 sec. in the AM or • The parameters to be announced can be selected in
the Others set mode. (p. 131)
10
FM mode, respectively.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the dial lock func-
• In the AM or FM data mode, push to return to the
AM or FM mode, respectively. tion ON or OFF. (p. 82) 11
➥ Switches D1, D2 and D3 when pushed and held • The dial lock function electronically locks the main
for 1 sec. in the AM or FM data mode. dial. 12
• The lock indicator lights while the dial lock function is
@2 FILTER SWITCH [FILTER] (p. 76) activated. 13
➥ Push to select one of 3 IF filter settings. OTE: The [SPEECH/LOCK] switch operation
N
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to display the filter set to activate the voice synthesizer or the dial lock 14
screen. functions can be replaced in the Others set
@3 EXIT/SET SWITCH [EXIT/SET]

mode. (p. 131) 15
➥ Push to exit, or return to the previous screen dis- @9 RIT/∂TX CONTROL [RIT/∂TX] (pgs. 73, 87)
play during spectrum scope, memory, scan or Shifts the receive and/or transmit frequency with- 16
set mode screen display. out changing the transmit and/or receive frequency
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to display the set mode shown on the main VFO while the RIT and/or ∂TX 17
menu screen. functions are/is ON.
@4 VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH [REC] (p. 91)

• Rotate the control clockwise to increase the frequency, 18
or rotate the control counterclockwise to decrease the
➥ Push to store the previous received signal for the
preset time period.
frequency. The RIT or ∂TX functions must be ON.
• The shift frequency range is ±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps
19
(or ±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps).
• The preset time period can be set in the voice set
mode. (p. 97) Shift high
20
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to start recording the
received signal until the recording is stopped. 21
• Push this switch momentarily to stop recording.
• The memory records the latest 30 sec. of audio. Shift low

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
#0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9

POWER 10 14 18
4 5 6
DUAL
WATCH 21 24 28
TRANSMIT 7 8 9
TUNER MONITOR
PHONES BAL NR CHANGE

GENE 50 0 F-INP ENT $0
MAIN
/SUB
M.SCOPE
MP-W
MW
MP-R
VFO/MEMO
PBT-CLR
NOTCH
NOTCH APF/TPF
CW PITCH
$1
ELEC-KEY
XFC TS
NB
AF
NR
RF/SQL
$2
RIT Ӡ TX CLEAR
MIC RIT/Ӡ TX
$3
AUTO
F- 1 F- 2 F- 3 F- 4 F- 5 F- 6 TUNE
SPEECH
$5 $4
#0 TRANSMIT INDICATOR [TX] #7 SPLIT SWITCH [SPLIT] (p. 88)

Lights red while transmitting. ➥ Push to turn the split function ON or OFF.
• “ ” appears when the split function is in
#1 RECEIVE INDICATOR [RX] use.
Lights green while receiving a signal and when the ➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to activate the quick
squelch is open. split function.
• Turns the split function ON and equalizes the sub
#2 LCD FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 13) readout frequency to the main readout and sets the
Shows the operating frequency, function switch sub readout for frequency input in the non-FM modes.
menus, spectrum scope screen, memory list (p. 89)
screen, set mode settings, etc. • T he offset frequency is shifted from the selected
VFO frequency in the FM mode. (p. 129)
#3 SPLIT OPERATION INDICATOR [SPLIT] (p. 88) • The tone encoder function is turned ON in the FM
Lights during split frequency operation. mode.
• The quick split function can be turned OFF in the
#4 MAIN/SUB CHANGE SWITCH [CHANGE] Others set mode. (p. 129)
➥ Switches the frequency and selected memory
channel between main and sub readouts when #8 KEYPAD
pushed. ➥ Pushing a key selects the operating band. (p. 27)
• Switches between transmit frequency and receive • [GEN •] selects the general coverage band.
frequency when the split frequency function is ON. ➥ P ushing the same key 2 or 3 times calls up
(p. 88) other stacked frequencies in the band. (p. 27)
➥ Equalizes the sub readout frequency to the main • Icom’s triple band stacking register memorizes 3 fre-
readout frequency when pushed and held for 1 quencies in each band.
sec. ➥ After pushing [F-INP ENT], push a key on the
keypad to enter a numeric frequency. After en-
#5 LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK] (p. 82) tering, push [F-INP ENT] to select the desired
Lights when the dial lock function is activated. frequency directly (p. 28)
• e.g. to enter 14.195 MHz;
#6 DUALWATCH SWITCH [DUALWATCH] (p. 79) Push [F-INP ENT] [1] [4] [•] [1] [9] [5] [F-INP ENT].
➥ Push to turn the dualwatch function ON or OFF. ➥ After pushing [F-INP ENT], push a key on the
• “ ” appears when the dualwatch function keypad to enter a memory channel. After enter-
ON.
ing, push [∫] or [√] to directly select the desired
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the dualwatch
memory channel. (p. 99)
function ON and equalize the sub readout fre-
quency to the main readout. (Quick dualwatch
function)
• The quick dualwatch function can be turned OFF in
the Others set mode. (p. 128)

PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
#9 PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN-PBT] ✔ What is the notch function?

(p. 75) The notch function is a narrow filter that eliminates un-
wanted CW or AM carrier tones while preserving the de-
Adjusts the receiver’s IF filter passband width via
sired voice signal. The DSP circuit automatically adjusts
the DSP. the notch frequency to effectively eliminate unwanted
• Passband width and shift frequency are displayed in
tones.
the multi-function display.
• Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the PBT
settings. $2 ∂TX SWITCH [∂TX] (p. 87)
• Adjustment range is set to half of the IF filter passband ➥ Push to turn the ∂TX function ON or OFF.
width. 25 Hz steps and 100 Hz steps are available. • Use [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the ∂TX frequency.
✔ What is the PBT control? ➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to add the ∂TX shift
The PBT function electronically modifies the IF pass- frequency to the operating frequency. 1
band width to reject interference. This transceiver uses ✔ What is the ∂TX function?
the DSP circuit for the PBT function. ∂TX shifts the transmit frequency without shifting the re- 2
ceive frequency. This is useful for simple split frequency
PBT2
operation in CW, etc. 3
PBT1
$3 CLEAR SWITCH [CLEAR] (pgs. 73, 87) 4

Push or push and hold for 1 sec.* to clear the RIT/
∂TX shift frequency. 5
* Depending on the quick RIT/∂TX clear function setting
– +
(p. 132). 6
$4 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK SWITCH
[XFC]
7
➥ Directly monitors the transmit frequency (including
∂TX frequency offset) when pushed and held dur- 8
ing split frequency operation. (p. 88)
• While pushing and holding this switch, the transmit 9
frequency can be changed with the main dial, key-
High cut Center Low cut
pad, memo pad or [∫]/[√] switches. 10
• When the split lock function is turned ON, pushing
$0 PBT CLEAR SWITCH [PBT-CLR] (p. 75) [XFC] cancels the dial lock function. (pgs. 88, 129)
➥ Monitors the operating frequency directly when
11
Push and hold for 1 sec. to clear the PBT settings.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when PBT is in
use.
pushed and held when the RIT function is
turned ON. (RIT is temporarily cancelled.) (p. 73)
12
$1 NOTCH SWITCH [NOTCH] (p. 83) $5 MAIN/SUB•M.SCOPE SWITCH 13
➥ Switches the notch function between auto, man- [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE]
ual and OFF in the SSB and AM modes. ➥ Push to select access to the main or sub read- 14
• Either auto or manual notch function can be deacti- out. (p. 26)
vated in the Others set mode. (p. 132)
➥ Turns the manual notch function ON or OFF
• The selected readout frequency is displayed clearly.
The sub readout functions only during split operation
15
or dualwatch.
when pushed in the CW, RTTY or PSK mode.
➥ Turns the auto notch function ON or OFF when ➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the mini spec- 16
pushed in the FM mode. trum scope screen display ON or OFF. (p. 67)
• “ ” appears when manual notch is in use. • The mini spectrum scope screen can be displayed 17
• “ ” appears when auto notch is in use. with another screen, such as memory, set mode
• N o indicator appears when the notch function is screen, simultaneously. 18
OFF.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to switch the manual 19
notch characteristics from wide, middle and nar-
row when manual notch function is activated.
20
function is activated.
21

1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
$6 $7 $8 $9 %0 %1

POWER 10 14 18
4 5 6
DUAL
WATCH 21 24 28
TRANSMIT 7 8 9
TUNER MONITOR
GENE 50 F-INP ENT
BAL NR CHANGE 0
%2
PHONES
MAIN
%3
/SUB
ELEC-KEY
XFC TS
NB NR
%4
AF RF/SQL
RIT Ӡ TX CLEAR
%5
MIC RIT/Ӡ TX
AUTO
F- 1 F- 2 F- 3 F- 4 F- 5 F- 6 TUNE
SPEECH
$6 MEMORY UP/DOWN SWITCHES [∫]/[√] (p. 99) %0 VFO/MEMORY SWITCH [VFO/MEMO]

➥ Push to select the desired memory channel. ➥ Switches the selected readout operating mode
• Memory channels can be selected in both the VFO between the VFO and memory when pushed.
and memory modes. (pgs. 26, 99)
➥ Push to directly select the desired memory chan- ➥ Transfers the memory contents to VFO when
nel after pushing [F-INP ENT] and a memory pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. 102)
channel number.
%1 QUICK TUNING SWITCH [TS]
$7 MEMORY WRITE SWITCH [MW] (p. 101) ➥ Turns the quick tuning step ON or OFF. (p. 29)
Stores the selected readout frequency and operat- • While the quick tuning indicator, “Z,” is displayed
ing mode into the displayed memory channel when above the frequency display, the frequency can be
pushed and held for 1 sec. changed in programmed kHz steps.
• This function is available both in VFO and memory • 0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 and 25 kHz steps are select-
modes. able for each operating mode independently.
➥ When the quick tuning step is ON, push and hold
$8 MEMO PAD-WRITE SWITCH [MP-W] (p. 104) for 1 sec. to select the quick tuning step set mode.
Programs the displayed readout frequency and op- (p. 29)
erating mode into a memo pad. ➥ When the quick tuning step is OFF, push and
• The 5 most recent entries remain in memo pads. hold for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON or
• The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10 OFF. (p. 30)
in the Others set mode. (p. 132)
%2 AUDIO PEAK FILTER/TWIN PEAK FILTER
$9 MEMO PAD-READ SWITCH [MP-R] (p. 104)
SWITCH [APF/TPF]
Each push calls up a frequency and operating
During CW mode operation (p. 39)
mode in a memo pad. The 5 (or 10) most recently
➥ Push to turn the audio peak filter ON or OFF.
programmed frequencies and operating modes can • “ ” appears when audio peak filter is in use.
be recalled, starting from the most recent. ➥ When the audio peak filter is ON, push and hold
• The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10
for 1 sec. to select the APF passband width be-
in the Others set mode. (p. 132)
tween WIDE, MID and NAR or between 320,
160 and 80 Hz, depending on APF type setting
(SOFT or SHARP).
During RTTY mode operation (p. 47)
➥ Push to turn the twin peak filter ON or OFF.
• “ ” appears when twin peak filter is in use.
function is activated.

PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
%3 CW PITCH CONTROL [CW PITCH]

(outer control; p. 38)
Shifts the received CW audio pitch and the CW
side-tone pitch without changing the operating fre-
quency.
Higher pitch
Lower pitch
1
%4 MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL [NOTCH]
(inner control; p. 83) 2
Varies the notch frequency of the manual notch fil-
ter to reject an interfering signal while the manual
notch function is ON.
3

• Notch filter center frequency:
LSB/RTTY/PSK-R : –1040 Hz to +4060 Hz 4
USB/RTTY-R/PSK : –1060 Hz to +4040 Hz
CW :C W pitch freq. –2540 Hz to 5
CW pitch freq. +2540 Hz
AM : –5100 Hz to +5100 Hz 6
Higher frequency
7
8
Lower frequency
9
%5 RIT SWITCH [RIT] (p. 73)
➥ Push to turn the RIT function ON or OFF.
10
• Use [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the RIT frequency.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to add the RIT shift fre- 11
quency to the operating frequency.
✔ What is the RIT function?
12
The RIT (Receiver Incremental Tuning) shifts the receive
frequency without shifting the transmit frequency. 13
This is useful for fine tuning stations calling you off-fre-
quency or when you prefer to listen to slightly different- 14
sounding voice characteristics, etc.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
10
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
■ Rear panel
q w e r
1 ANT 2 DC 13.8V
RX-ANT ACC
X-VERTER IN OUT ALC SEND 1 2 KEY METER REMOTE EXT-SP
TUNER
!7 !6 !5 !4 !3 !2 !1 !0 o i u y t
q GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 16) u USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTOR (B type)
Connect this terminal to a ground to prevent electri- [USB] (B)
cal shocks, TVI, BCI and other problems. Connects to a PC, using a USB cable, to do the fol-
lowing:
w ANTENNA CONNECTOR 1 [ANT1] - Input the modulation (p. 124)
e ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 [ANT2] (pgs. 17, 112) - Remotely control the transceiver using CI-V com-
Accepts a 50 ø antenna with a PL-259 plug con- mands (p. 151)
nector. - Send the received audio to the PC (p. 124)
- Send the decoded characters to the PC
When using an optional AH-4 HF/50 MHz AUTO-
(pgs. 134, 135)
MATIC ANTENNA TUNER, connect it to the [ANT1]
connector. The internal antenna tuner activates CAUTION:
for [ANT2] and deactivates for [ANT1] when con- For Windows® 2000/XP:
necting the AH-4. NEVER install the USB driver into the PC before
connecting the transceiver and PC.
r DC POWER SOCKET [DC 13.8V] (p. 20) For Windows Vista®/Windows® 7:
Accepts 13.8 V DC through the supplied DC power NEVER connect a PC until the USB driver instal-
cable. lation has been completed.
Rear panel view
About the USB driver:
The USB driver and the installation guide can be
downloaded from our website.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html
The following items are required:
PC
• Microsoft® Windows® 2000/XP/Windows Vista®
t EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK [EXT-SP] (p. 18)
or Windows® 7 installed
Connects to an external speaker (4–8 ø), if desired.
• With USB port
y CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE] Other items
(pgs. 151, 18) • USB cable (purchase separately)
➥ Connects to a PC, using the optional CT-17 ci-v • PC software
level converter, for external control of the trans- About the modulation input:
ceiver. Select “USB” in the ACC set mode item ‘DATA OFF
➥ Used for transceive operation with another Icom MOD,’ ‘DATA1 MOD,’ ‘DATA2 MOD’ or ‘DATA3 MOD.’
CI-V transceiver or receiver. And the modulation input level from USB jack can
be set in the ACC set mode item ‘USB MOD Level.’
(p. 124)
11
PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
i METER JACK [METER] (p. 19) !5 RECEIVE ANTENNA OUT [RX ANT– OUT]
Outputs a signal showing received signal strength, !6 RECEIVE ANTENNA IN [RX ANT– IN]
transmit output power, VSWR, ALC, speech com- Located between the transmit/receive switching cir-
pression, Vd or Id level for external meter display. cuit and receiver’s RF stage.
o STRAIGHT KEY JACK [KEY] (p. 17) Connects an external unit, such as preamplifier or
Accepts a straight key or external electronic keyer RF filter, using RCA connectors, if desired.
output using a standard 1⁄4 inch plug. In this case, the antenna connector must be se-
• [ ELEC-KEY] on the front panel can be used for a lected as “ANT 1/R” or “ANT 2/R.” (p. 112)
straight key or external electronic keyer. Deactivate the • When no external unit is connected, “ANT 1” or “ANT 2”
internal electronic keyer in the keyer set mode. (p. 45) must be selected.
(+)
1
Receiver
(_) IN
2
[RX ANT]
3
!0 ACCESSORY SOCKET 2 [ACC 2] OUT
!1 ACCESSORY SOCKET 1 [ACC 1]
Enable connection of external equipment such as
4
a linear amplifier, an automatic antenna selector/
tuner, a TNC for data communications, etc.
5
• See p. 24 for socket information.
6
ANT
Transmit/Receive
switching circuit
!2 TUNER CONTROL SOCKET [TUNER] (p. 18)
Accepts the control cable from an optional AH-4 Transmitter
7
HF/50 MHz AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER.
!3 SEND CONTROL JACK [SEND] (p. 18)

8
!7 TRANSVERTER CONNECTOR [X-VERTER]
Connects to ground when transmitting to control an
external unit, such as a non-Icom linear amplifier.
(p. 18) 9
External transverter input/output connector.
OTE: T/R control voltage and current must be
N
less than 16 V DC/0.5 A (or 250 V AC, 200 mA
Activated by voltage applied to [ACC 2] pin 6, or 10
when the transverter function is in use. (p. 24)
with MOSFET switching).
11
!4 ALC INPUT JACK [ALC] (p. 18)
Connects to the ALC output jack of a non-Icom lin- 12
ear amplifier.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
12
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
■ LCD display
@0 @1 @2 @3
!9 @4
q w e r t y u i
!0 o
!8 !0
!5 w
!1
!1
e
!7
!2
!3
!4
!6 !5
!3 !2
q S/RF METER (pgs. 35, 126) w IF FILTER INDICATOR (p. 76)

Shows the signal strength while receiving. Shows Shows the selected IF filter number.
the relative output power, SWR, ALC, VD, ID or
compression levels while transmitting. e QUICK TUNING INDICATOR (p. 29)
• A total of 3 meter types are available. Appears when the quick tuning step function is in
• Standard meter use.
r BANDWIDTH INDICATOR (p. 75)

Shows the passband width of the IF filter.
t SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR (p. 75)

Shows the shift frequency of the IF filter.
• Edgewise meter
y PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 75)
Graphically displays the passband width for twin
PBT operation and the center frequency for IF shift
operation.
u BANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR

• Bar meter
Appears when the narrow filter (500 Hz or less) is
selected during SSB, CW, RTTY or PSK operation.
i CLOCK READOUT
Shows the current time.
Local and UTC time can be displayed at the same
time.
• Offset time period for UTC time can be set in the time
set mode. (p. 115)
13
PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
o RTTY TUNING INDICATOR @2 NOTCH INDICATOR (p. 83)

Shows the tuning condition in the RTTY mode. ➥ “ ” appears when the manual notch function
is in use. This function is available in the SSB,
!0 MODE INDICATOR CW, RTTY, PSK and AM modes.
Shows the selected mode. ➥ “ ” appears when the auto notch function is in
use. This function is available in the SSB, AM
!1 FREQUENCY READOUTS
and FM modes.
Shows the operating frequency.
• Gray characters are used for not-selected readout. @3 APF/TPF INDICATOR
!2 MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS ➥ “ ” appears when the audio peak filter func-
➥ Shows the selected memory channel contents in tion is in use. This function is available in the
VFO mode. CW mode. (p. 39) 1
➥ Shows the VFO contents in memory mode. ➥ “ ” appears when the twin peak filter func-
tion is in use. This function is available in the
RTTY mode. (p. 47)
2
!3 SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 109)
Displays the displayed memory channel is set as a
select memory channel. @4 DUAL WATCH INDICATOR 3
“ ” appears when the dualwatch function
The select memory channels are used in the select
scan operation. The desired memory channels can is in use. 4
be assigned to 3 select groups, for fast, convenient
scanning. 5
!4 MULTI-FUNCTION SCREEN 6
Shows the screens for the multi-function digital
meter, spectrum scope, voice recorder, memory list, 7
scan, memory keyer, RTTY decoder, PSK decoder,
IF filter selection or set modes, etc. 8
!5 VFO/MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 26)
Displays the VFO mode or selected memory chan- 9
nel number.
10
!6 LCD FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE
Displays the function of the LCD function switches 11
([F-1] to [F-6]).
!7 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE 12

Displays the function of the multi-function switches.
13
!8 TX INDICATOR
➥ “ ” appears while transmitting. (p. 36) 14
➥ Displays the frequency readout for transmit.
• “ ” appears during an operating frequency is
not in an amateur band. When the band edge warn-
15
ing beep is set to “OFF” (p. 31), “ ” does not
appear. 16
• Appears on the sub band readout when the split
function is turned ON. 17
!9 RIT INDICATOR
“ ” appears when RIT function is in use.
18
@0 ∂TX INDICATOR 19
“ ” appears when ∂TX function is in use.
@1 RIT/∂TX SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR

20
Shows the shift frequency for the RIT or ∂TX func-
tion.
21
14
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
■ Screen menu arrangement

The following screens can be selected from the Pushing [EXIT/SET] several times returns to the
start-up screen. Choose the desired screen using the start-up screen. See p. 119 for set mode arrangement.
following chart.
• PSK decoder screen (PSK mode; p. 54)
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-3
• Spectrum scope screen (p. 65) • Memory list screen (p. 100)
F-4
• Voice recorder screen* (p. 90) • Scan screen (VFO mode; p. 107)
F-2 F-5
• Memory keyer screen (CW mode; p. 40) • Scan screen (Memory mode; p. 109)
F-3 F-5
• RTTY decoder screen (RTTY mode; p. 46) • Set mode menu screen (p. 118)
F-3 F-6
*Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is displayed.

Push [T/R] (F-6) to switch the screen.
15
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2
■ Unpacking ■ Antenna connection
After unpacking, immediately report any damage to For radio communications, the antenna is of criti-
the delivering carrier or dealer. Keep the shipping cal importance, along with output power and receiver
cartons. sensitivity. Select antenna(s), such as a well-matched
For a description and a diagram of accessory equip- 50 ø antenna, and feedline. We recommend 1.5:1 or
ment included with the IC-7600, see ‘Supplied acces- better of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) on
sories’ on p. i of this manual. your operating bands. The transmission line should
be a coaxial cable.
When using a single antenna, use the [ANT1] con-
■ Selecting a location nector.
elect a location for the transceiver that allows ade-
S
CAUTION: Protect your transceiver from light-
quate air circulation, free from extreme heat, cold, or
vibrations, and away from TV sets, TV antenna ele-
ning by using a lightning arrestor. 1
ments, radios and other electromagnetic sources.
2
T he base of the transceiver has adjustable feet
for desktop use. Set the feet to one of two angles
PL-259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE 3
depending on your operating preference. q 30 mm Slide the coupling ring
down. Strip the cable 4
jacket and soft solder.
Coupling ring 10 mm (soft solder)
5
w 10 mm Strip the cable as
Soft
solder shown at left. Soft sol- 6
der the center con-
1–2 mm ductor. 7
solder solder
e
■ Grounding
Slide the connector
body on and solder it.
8
o prevent electrical shock, television interference
T 9
(TVI), broadcast interference (BCI) and other prob- r Screw the coupling
lems, ground the transceiver through the GROUND ring onto the connec-
tor body.
10
terminal on the rear panel.
For best results, connect a heavy gauge wire or strap 30 mm (9⁄8 in) 10 mm (3⁄8 in) 1–2 mm (1⁄16 in) 11
to a long ground rod. Make the distance between the
[GND] terminal and ground as short as possible. 12
Antenna SWR
R WARNING: NEVER connect the [GND] Each antenna is tuned for a specified frequency 13
terminal to a gas or electric pipe, since the connec-
range and SWR may be increased out-of-range.
tion could cause an explosion or electric shock.
When the SWR is higher than approx. 2.0:1, the 14
transceiver’s power drops to protect the final tran-
[GND]
sistors. In this case, an antenna tuner is useful 15
to match the transceiver and antenna. Low SWR
allows full power for transmitting. The IC-7600 has 16
an SWR meter to monitor the antenna SWR contin-
uously. 17
18
19
20
21
16
2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
■ Required connections
D Front panel
CW KEY
POWER 10 14 18
4 5 6
DUAL
WATCH 21 24 28
TRANSMIT 7 8 9
TUNER MONITOR
GENE 50 F-INP ENT

MAIN
/SUB
ELEC-KEY
XFC TS
NB NR
AF RF/SQL
RIT Ӡ TX CLEAR
MIC RIT/Ӡ TX
AUTO
F- 1 F- 2 F- 3 F- 4 F- 5 F- 6 TUNE
SPEECH
A straight key can be used MICROPHONES (p. 23)

when the internal electronic
keyer is turned OFF in
keyer set mode. (p. 45)
HM-36 SM-50
D Rear panel
ANTENNA 1, 2 (p. 16) DC POWER SUPPLY (p. 20)
[Example]: ANT1 for 1.8–18 MHz bands
ANT 2 for 21–28 MHz bands
PS-126
1 ANT 2 DC 13.8V
RX-ANT ACC
TUNER
GROUND Use the heaviest gauge STRAIGHT KEY

(p. 16) wire or strap available and
make the connection as
short as possible.
Grounding prevents electri-

cal shocks, TVI and other
problems.
17
■ Advanced connections
D Front panel
USB-MEMORY HEADPHONES
POWER 10 14 18
4 5 6
DUAL
WATCH 21 24 28
TRANSMIT 7 8 9
TUNER MONITOR
GENE 50 F-INP ENT

MAIN
/SUB
ELEC-KEY
XFC TS
NB NR
AF RF/SQL
RIT Ӡ TX CLEAR
MIC RIT/Ӡ TX
AUTO
F- 1 F- 2 F- 3 F- 4 F- 5 F- 6
KEYBOARD
TUNE
SPEECH
MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED
Connect a USB type PC keyboard

VOICE MEMORY
for direct RTTY/PSK operation, as

well as other text edit operations.
1
EXTERNAL KEYPAD
Connect an external keypad for direct voice memory, keyer
memory, RTTY TX memory and PSK TX memory controls.
2
To [MIC] connector pin e EXTERNAL KEYPAD
3
MIC
1.5k˘ 1.5k˘ 2.2k˘ 4.7k˘
The AFSK modulation signal can also
be input to [MIC]. S1
±5%
S2 S3 S4
±5% ±5% ±5%
4
(T1/M1/ (T2/M2/ (T3/M3/ (T4/M4/
To [MIC] connector pin u RT1/PT1) RT2/PT2) RT3/PT3) RT4/PT4)
5
6
D Rear panel— 1
7
8
[REMOTE] (p. 151)
Used for computer
9
control and transceive
with
operation. 10
The optional CT-17 is
required when connect- 11
AH-4 (p. 20) AH-2b ing a PC to [REMOTE].
or long wire 12
13
ANTENNA 1, 2 (p. 112) 1 ANT 2 DC 13.8V
Connect a linear amplifier, 14

antenna selector, etc.
15
[X-VERTER] X-VERTER IN
RX-ANT
OUT ALC SEND 1
ACC
2 KEY METER REMOTE EXT-SP
16
Connect a transverter TUNER
for VHF, UHF or other

band use.
17
18
RX ANT IN/OUT ACC SOCKETS 1, 2 EXTERNAL SPEAKER
Connect an external (pgs. 22, 24) (p. 161) 19
preamp or lowpass filter.
20
The antenna connector [ALC], [SEND] (p. 21)
must be selected as “ANT Used for connecting a SP-23
(option)
21
1/R” or “ANT 2/R.” (p. 3) non-Icom linear amplifier.
18
D Rear panel— 2
1 ANT 2 DC 13.8V
RX-ANT ACC
TUNER
[METER] [USB] (B)

Connect an external meter, etc. When the transceiver is connected
to a PC, a USB cable (purchase
3.5 (d) mm; 1⁄8" plug
separately) should be connected to
the USB connector (B type) on the
rear panel. (p. 11)
Output impedance : 4.7 kø
Output voltage (open circuit) : 2.5 V (default)
Output voltage can be adjusted 0 to 5 V
in ACC set mode. (p. 125)
■ USB connection
onnect the USB-Memory* to the USB connector
C
(A type) on the front panel.
• Unmount operation is recommended before removing the
USB-Memory* (p.142).
Be sure to connect the USB-Memory correctly.

NEVER connect or remove the USB-Memory when
the read/write indicator lights or blinks.
A USB keyboard* or a USB hub* can also be

connected to the USB connector.
* U SB-Memory, USB keyboard and USB hub are not

supplied by Icom. or
19
■ Power supply connections

Use a DC power supply with a 23 A capacity when
operating the transceiver with AC power. Refer to the CAUTION: Before connecting the DC power
diagrams below. cable, check the following important items. Make
sure:
• The [POWER] switch is OFF.
• Output voltage of the power source is 12–15 V
when you use a non-Icom power supply.
• DC power cable polarity is correct.
Red : Positive + terminal
Black : Negative _ terminal
CONNECTING PS-126 DC POWER SUPPLY

1
AC outlet To DC power socket
Transceiver
2
PS-126
3
4
AC cable 5
DC power
cable
GND 6
7
CONNECTING A DC POWER SUPPLY
Transceiver
8
AC outlet A DC power supply
9
13.8 V; at least 23 A
+ _
10
11
GND To DC power
30 A fuses socket 12
AC cable Red Black Supplied DC power cable
13
14
■ External antenna tuner connection 15
CONNECTING THE AH-4
The AH-4 must be connected to [ANT1].
16
Coaxial cable (from the AH-4) 17
[ANT1]
Long wire or optional AH-2b
18
Transceiver
19
20
AH-4
GND
[TUNER]
GND
21
Control cable
20
■ Linear amplifier connections

D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO
Remote control cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)
To an
antenna ACC-1 ACC cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)
Coaxial cable
REMOTE (supplied with the
ANT IC-PW1/EURO) Be sure to connect the cable
to the 7-pin ACC 2 jack.
INPUT1
INPUT2 Coaxial cable*
Connect
[INPUT2] ANT1 ANT2 ACC 2 REMOTE
if necessary
EXCITER
1 1&2 GND
GND
IC-PW1/EURO Transceiver
GND
AC outlet *Purchase separately
(Non-European versions : 100–120/220–240 V
European version : 230 V)
D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier

Transceiver R WARNING:
Set the transceiver output power and linear am-
ANT1
plifier ALC output level after referring to the linear
amplifier instruction manual.
The ALC input level must be in the range 0 V to
To an –4 V. The transceiver does not accept positive volt-
antenna ALC SEND
age. Non-matched ALC and RF power settings
50 ø could overheat or damage the linear amplifier.
coaxial
cable The maximum signal level of [SEND] jack is 16 V/
0.5 A DC with initial setting, and 250 V/ 200 mA
RF OUTPUT RF INPUT with “MOSFET” setting (see p. 125 for details). Use
ALC an external relay unit if your non-Icom linear ampli-
SEND fier requires control voltage and/or current greater
than specified.
Non-Icom linear amplifier
21
■ Transverter jack information

When 2 to 13.8 V is applied to pin 6 of [ACC 2], the
[X-VERTER] connector is activated for transverter op-
eration and the antenna connectors do not receive or
transmit any signals.
While receiving, the [X-VERTER] connector can be
activated as an input terminal from an external trans-
verter.
Transverter connector While transmitting, the [X-VERTER] connector out-
puts signals of the displayed frequency at –20 dBm
(22 mV) as signals for the external transverter.
1
■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections 2
To connect a TNC or scan converter, etc., refer to the diagram below.
D FSK operation— when connecting to [ACC 1]
3
• When using a PC application
RTTY RTTY OUTPUT Connect to serial port, parallel
4
port, speaker jack, microphone
2
GND
AF
GND
AUDIO INPUT
jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc. 5
4 5 See the instruction manual of the
6
1 8 3
SEND PTT application for details.
6 7 PC
Rear panel view
• When using a TNC

TNC or scan converter 7
RTTY
GND
RTTY OUTPUT
GND
RS-232C 8
9
2
4 5 AF AUDIO INPUT
1 8 3
6
SEND PTT
7
Rear panel view 10

D AFSK operation 11
• When connecting to [ACC 1] • When using a PC application
12
z Audio output Connect to serial port, parallel
z
2
x x GND
port, speaker jack, microphone
jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc.
13
4 5 c c AF input See the instruction manual of
1
6
8
7
3
v v PTT the application for details. PC 14
b
Rear panel view
n† 15
• When connecting to [MIC] • When using a TNC
RS-232C
16
z z AFSK output TNC or scan converter
c x
c AF input
17
q u x
b PTT*
18
w i y
v
e t
r GND
b
v*
n† SQL input†
Front panel view
n† *When using the VOX function, no need to connect. Refer to the instruction
manual of the external equipment (TNC, etc.).
19
When connecting the squelch line, consult the necessary manual (TNC, etc.).
20
†
D When connecting to the [USB] connector

Connect a USB cable (purchase separately) between the transceiver’s USB connector [USB] (B) on the rear panel 21
and the PC. (p. 19)
• The USB driver and the installation guide can be downloaded from our website (http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html).
22
■ Microphone connector information

(Front panel view)
[MIC]
i Main readout AF output FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Pin No.
(varies with [AF])
w +8 V DC output Max. 10 mA
q Microphone input u GND
(Microphone ground) Frequency up Ground
e
w +8 V DC output y GND (PTT ground) Frequency down Ground through 470 ˘
Squelch open “Low” level
e Frequency up/down t PTT r
Squelch closed “High” level
r Main readout squelch switch
AUTION: DO NOT short pin 2 to ground as this
C
can damage the internal 8 V regulator. DC voltage
is applied to pin 1 for microphone operation. Use
caution when using a non-Icom microphone.
■ Microphones
D HM-36
q UP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN]
q
Change the selected readout frequency or memory
q channel.
• Pressing a switch continuously changes the frequency
w or memory channel number continuously.
• While pushing [XFC], the transmit readout frequency
w can be controlled while in split frequency operation.
• The [UP]/[DN] switch can simulate a key paddle. Preset
in the keyer set mode. (p. 45)
w PTT SWITCH
Push and hold to transmit; release to receive.
e PTT LOCK SWITCH (available for SM-50 only)

Push to toggle between transmit and receive.
D SM-50 (Option) r LOW CUT SWITCH (available for SM-50 only)
Push to cut out the low frequency components of
input voice signals.
q
r
q
w e
r
w e
23
■ Accessory socket information

ACC 1 PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
“High” level : More than 2.4 V
1 RTTY Controls RTTY keying “Low” level : Less than 0.6 V
Output current : Less than 2 mA
Connects to ground.
2 GND —
Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 2.
An external equip-
ment controls the
Input voltage (High) : 2.0 V to 20.0 V
transceiver.
Input voltage (Low) : –0.5 V to 0.8 V
Input/output pin. When this pin goes Current flow : Max. 20 mA
Connected in par- low, the transceiv-
3 SEND*
allel with ACC 2 er transmits. 1
2 pin 3. The transceiver out-
1
4 5
8 3
puts a low signal Output voltage (Low) : Less than 0.1 V 2
to control external Current flow : Max. 200 mA
6 7 equipment. 3
Modulator input. Input impedance : 10 k˘
4 MOD
Connects to a modulator Input level : Approx. 100 mV rms 4
AF detector output.
Output impedance : 4.7 k˘
5 AF Fixed, regardless of [AF] position in
default settings. (see NOTE below)
Output level : 100–300 mV rms 5
6 SQLS
Squelch output. SQL open
Goes to ground when squelch opens. SQL closed
: Less than 0.3 V/5 mA
: More than 6.0 V/100 µA
6
7 13.8 V
13.8 V output when power is ON.
Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 7.
Output current : Max. 1 A 7
8 ALC
ALC voltage input. Control voltage
Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 5. Input impedance
: –4 V to 0 V
: More than 10 k˘
8
NOTE: If the CW sidetone level limit or beep level limit is in use, the CW sidetone or beep tone decreases from 9
the fixed level when the [AF] control is rotated above a specified level. (p. 123)
10
ACC 2 PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION
Output voltage
SPECIFICATIONS
: 8.0 V ±0.3 V
11
1 8 V Regulated 8 V output.
2 GND Same as ACC 1 pin 2.

Output current : Less than 10 mA
12
4
2
5
3 SEND* Same as ACC 1 pin 3. 13
1 3 Band voltage output.
4 BAND Output voltage : 0 V to 8.0 V
6 7 (Varies with amateur band) 14
5 ALC Same as ACC 1 pin 8.
6 TRV
Activates [X-VERTER] input/output Input impedance : More than 10 k˘ 15
when “HIGH” voltage is applied. Input voltage : 2 V to 13.8 V
7 13.8 V Same as ACC 1 pin 7. 16
17
* When the SEND terminal controls the inductive load (such as a relay), a counter-electromotive force can cause
the transceiver’s malfunction or damage. To prevent this, we recommend adding a switching diode, such as an
18
“1SS133,” on the load side of the circuit to the counter-electromotive force absorption.
When the diode is added, a switching delay of the relay may occur. Be sure to check its switching action before
19
operation.
[Example] Switching diode
20
ACC 1/2 To a non-Icom
sockets linear amplifier 21
eSEND
Relay
u13.8V
24
3 BASIC OPERATION
■ Before first applying power

Before first applying power, make sure all connec- After all connections have been done, set controls
tions required for your system are complete by refer- and switches as shown in the figure below.
ring to Chapter 2.
[BAL] [NR] CW : Max. clockwise

: 12 o’clock : Max. CCW CCW : Max. counterclockwise

POWER 10 14 18
4 5 6
DUAL
WATCH 21 24 28
TRANSMIT 7 8 9
TUNER MONITOR
GENE 50 F-INP ENT

MAIN
/SUB
ELEC-KEY
XFC TS [NOTCH]
[RF/SQL] NB NR
: 12 o’clock
AF RF/SQL
: 12 o’clock RIT Ӡ TX CLEAR
MIC RIT/Ӡ TX
[CW PITCH]
[AF] F- 1 F- 2 F- 3 F- 4 F- 5 F- 6
AUTO
TUNE
: 12 o’clock
: Max. CCW MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED
SSB CW RTTY/PSK AM/FM FILTER EXIT/SET REC PLAY
VOICE MEMORY
SPEECH
LOCK
[MIC GAIN] [RF POWER] [BK-IN DELAY] [KEY SPEED]

: 12 o’clock : Max. CW : 12 o’clock : 10–12 o’clock
■ Applying power (CPU resetting)

First applying power: POWER MW F-INP ENT
Reset the transceiver using the following procedure.
esetting CLEARS all programmed contents in

R
memory channels and returns programmed values
in the set mode to default values.
q Make sure the transceiver power is OFF.

w While pushing and holding [F-INP ENT] and [MW],
push [POWER] to turn power ON.
• The CPU is reset.
• The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec.
• The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies
when resetting is complete.
e Change the set mode settings after resetting, if
desired.
Normal applying power:

Push [POWER] to turn power ON, then check the dis-
play. When any of indicators appear, turn them OFF if
necessary. (See the appropriate page for details.)
25
BASIC OPERATION 3
■ Selecting VFO/memory mode

➥ Push [VFO/MEMO] to switch between VFO and VFO/MEMO
memory modes.
• “VFO” appears when in VFO mode, or the selected
memory channel number appears when in memory
mode.
• Pushing and holding [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. transfers
the contents of the selected memory channel to VFO
mode. (p. 102)
1
2
“VFO” indicator Memory channel number
3
4
■ Main/Sub band selection
The IC-7600 has a main and a sub band.
MAIN
/SUB
5
M.SCOPE
The main band is displayed on the left hand side, and
the sub band is displayed on the right hand side of 6
the LCD. Some functions can only be applied to the
selected band, and transmission occurs on only the 7
main band (except during split frequency operation).
8
➥ Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] to select access to
the main or sub band readout. 9
• The selected readout frequency is displayed clearly.
The sub readout functions only during split operation or
dualwatch.
10
MAIN band SUB band MAIN band SUB band 11
12
13
Access to MAIN band Access to SUB band 14
15
D Main/Sub band switching
➥ P ush [CHANGE] to switch the frequency and CHANGE
16
selected memory channel between main and sub
readouts. 17
• Switches between transmit frequency and receive fre-
quency when the split frequency function is ON. (p. 88) 18
19
D Main/Sub band equalization
➥ Push and hold [CHANGE] for 1 sec. to equalizes 20
the sub band readout to the main band readout.
21
26
3 BASIC OPERATION
■ Selecting an operating band

The triple band stacking register provides 3 memories Band keys
for each band key, for storing frequency and mode
information.
This function is convenient when you operate 3 oper-

ating modes on one band. For example, one register
is used for a CW frequency, another for a SSB fre-
quency and the other one for a RTTY frequency.
If a band key is pushed once, the frequency and oper-

ating mode last used are called up. When the key is
pushed again, another stored frequency and operat-
ing mode are called up.
See the table below for a list of the bands available

and the default settings for each band.
BAND REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 3

1.8 MHz 1.900000 MHz CW 1.910000 MHz CW 1.915000 MHz CW
3.5 MHz 3.550000 MHz LSB 3.560000 MHz LSB 3.580000 MHz LSB
7 MHz 7.050000 MHz LSB 7.060000 MHz LSB 7.020000 MHz CW
10 MHz 10.120000 MHz CW 10.130000 MHz CW 10.140000 MHz CW
14 MHz 14.100000 MHz USB 14.200000 MHz USB 14.050000 MHz CW
18 MHz 18.100000 MHz USB 18.130000 MHz USB 18.150000 MHz USB
50 MHz 50.100000 MHz USB 50.200000 MHz USB 51.000000 MHz FM
General 15.000000 MHz USB 15.100000 MHz USB 15.200000 MHz USB
D Using the band stacking registers

[Example]: 14 MHz band
q Push [14 5], then select a frequency and an oper-
1.8 1 3.5 2 7 3
ating mode.
• The previously selected frequency and an operating
mode are memorized in the first band stacking register 10 4 14 5 18 6
of that band.
w Push [14 5] again, then select another frequency
and operating mode. 21 7 24 8 28 9
• The frequency and operating mode that is selected
in step q are memorized in the 14 MHz’s first band GENE 50 F-INP ENT
stacking register. 0
e Push [14 5] again, then select another frequency
and operating mode.
• The frequency and operating mode that is selected in
step w are memorized in the 14 MHz’s second band
stacking register.
r Push [14 5] again, then select another frequency
and operating mode.
• The frequency and operating mode that is selected
in step e are memorized in the 14 MHz’s third band
stacking register.
• When [14 5] is pushed again, the first band stacking
register set in step w, is overwritten.
27
BASIC OPERATION 3
■ Frequency setting
The transceiver has several tuning methods for con-
venient frequency tuning.
D Tuning with the main dial

q Push the desired band key on the keypad 1–3 Band keys
times.
• 3 different frequencies can be selected on each band
with the band key. (See previous page “Using the band
stacking registers.”)
w Rotate the main dial to set the desired frequency.
If the dial lock function is activated, the lock indica- 1

tor lights, and the main dial does not function.
In this case, push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for
Main dial
2
1 sec. to deactivate the lock function. (p. 82)
When “LOCK/SPEECH” is selected in “[SPEECH/ 3
LOCK] Switch” item in the Others set mode, push-
ing [SPEECH/LOCK] deactivates the lock function. 4
(see p. 131 for details)
5
D Direct frequency entry with the keypad 6
The transceiver has a keypad for direct frequency
entry as described below. 7
q Push [F-INP ENT].
Keypad
8
• “ ” indicator appears.
w Input the desired frequency. 9
• Push [GENE •] to input “. (decimal point)” between the
MHz units and kHz units.
e Push [F-INP ENT] to set the input frequency.
10
• To cancel the input, push [EXIT/SET].
11
12
[EXAMPLE]
14.025 MHz
F-INP ENT 1.8 1 10 4 GEN • 50 0 3.5 2 14 5 F-INP ENT
13
18.0725 MHz
14
F-INP ENT 1.8 1 24 8 GEN • 50 0 21 7 3.5 2 14 5 F-INP ENT
15
706 kHz
F-INP ENT 50 0 GEN • 21 7 50 0 18 6 F-INP ENT
16
5.100 MHz
F-INP ENT 14 5 GEN • 1.8 1 F-INP ENT 17
7.000 MHz 18
F-INP ENT 21 7 F-INP ENT
21.280 MHz � 21.245 MHz

19
20
F-INP ENT GEN • 3.5 2 10 4 14 5 F-INP ENT
21
28
3 BASIC OPERATION
D About the 5 MHz band operation (USA version only)

Operation on the 5 MHz band is allowed on 5 discrete
IC-7600 Displayed FCC Channel
frequencies and must adhere to the following: Frequency* Center Frequency*
• The USB mode
5.33050 MHz 5.33200 MHz
• Maximum of 50 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power)
• 2.8 kHz bandwidth 5.34650 MHz 5.34800 MHz
5.36650 MHz 5.36800 MHz
It’s your responsibility to set all controls so that trans-
mission in this band meets the stringent conditions 5.37150 MHz 5.37300 MHz
under which amateur operations may use these fre- 5.40350 MHz 5.40500 MHz
quencies.
OTE: We recommend that you store these fre-
N To assist you in operating the 5 MHz band within
quencies, mode and filter settings into memory the rules specified by the FCC, transmission is
channels for easy recall. illegal on any 5 MHz band frequency other than the
five frequencies shown in the table above.
*T he FCC specifies center frequencies on the
5 MHz band. However, the IC-7600 displays car-
rier frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to
1.5 kHz below the specified FCC channel center
frequency.
D Quick tuning step TS
The operating frequency can be changed in larger

steps (0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz selectable)
for quick tuning.
q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON.

• “Z” appears when the quick tuning function is ON.
w Rotate the main dial to change the frequency in
programmed kHz steps. Main dial
e Push [TS] again to turn the quick tuning function
OFF. Quick tuning indicator
• “Z” disappears.
r Rotate the main dial for normal tuning, if desired.
D Selecting “kHz” step DEF

TS
q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON. F-4
• “Z” appears when the quick tuning function ON.
w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to select the quick
tuning step set mode.
• Selected tuning steps for all modes appear.
e Select the desired operating mode.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired tuning
step.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to return to the
Mode selection EXIT/SET Main dial
default setting, if desired.
t Repeat steps e and r to select quick tuning steps
for other modes, if desired.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the setting display.
OTE: When entering the quick tuning step set

N
mode, the quick tuning function must be activated
first.
29
BASIC OPERATION 3
D Selecting 1 Hz step

A minimum tuning step of 1 Hz can be used for fine
tuning.
q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function OFF. TS

w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tun-
ing step ON or OFF.
NOTE:
• RIT and/or ∂TX also functions in 1 Hz tuning
steps when used.
• The frequency is changed in 50 Hz steps when
the [UP]/[DN] switches of the microphone are
used for the frequency setting (when the pro- 1
grammable tuning step is not selected.)
2
3
1 Hz step indicator 4
D Auto tuning step function
When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning speed 5
automatically accelerates, as selected.
6
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi- OTHERS SET
function screens, if necessary. F-5 F-6 7
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select the set mode menu
screen. 8
• Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects
the set mode menu screen.
e Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to select the Others set
9
mode.
r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “MAIN DIAL 10
Auto TS.”
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired tuning
F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial 11
speed, between HIGH, LOW and OFF.
• HIGH : A pprox. 5 times faster when the tun- 12
ing step is set to 1 kHz or smaller steps;
approx. 2 times faster when the tuning 13
step is set to 5 kHz or larger.
• LOW : Approx. 2 times faster
HIGH (default)
14
• OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode. 15
16
D 1⁄4 tuning step function
When operating in SSB data, CW, RTTY or PSK, the 17
1⁄4 tuning function is available. Dial speed is reduced
to 1⁄4 of the normal speed when the 1⁄4 tuning function 18
is ON, for finer tuning control.
➥ Push [1/4] (MF7) to toggle the 1⁄4 tuning function

19
20
ON or OFF. 1⁄4
• “ ” appears when the 1⁄4 tuning function is ON.

¼ tuning step OFF ¼ tuning step ON
21
30
3 BASIC OPERATION
D Band edge warning beep

This function allows you to hear a beep tone when you tune When the transverter function is in use, the band
in or out of an amateur band’s frequency range. A regular edge warning beep sounds with the default setting.
beep sounds when you tune into a range, and an lower
tone error beep will sound when you tune out of a range.
Also, the TX indicator shows if the selected frequency
OTHERS SET
is in or out of an amateur band, when an option other
F-5 F-6
than “OFF” is set.
• A TX indicator with a doted, “ ” is displayed, instead of
the regular “ ” TX indicator, when a frequency outside
of an amateur band frequency range is selected.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi-

function screens, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select the set mode menu screen.
• Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects
the set mode menu screen. F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial
e Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to select the Others set mode.
r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Beep (Band
Edge).”
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired band
edge warning beep setting.
• OFF : Band edge beep is OFF.
• ON (Default) : When you tune into or out of the default
amateur band’s frequency range, a beep
sounds. (default)
• ON (User) : When you tune outside of, or back into ON (Default)
a user programmed amateur band’s fre-
Appears when “ON (User)” or
quency range, a beep sounds.
“ON (User) & TX Limit” is selected,
• ON (User) & TX Limit
:W hen you tune outside of, or back into a
user programmed amateur band’s frequency
range, a beep sounds. Transmission is also
inhibited outside the programmed range.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode.
ON (User)
The beep output level can be set in the level set
mode. (p. 123)
To programming the band edge:

q Perform the steps q to t as shown above, then select
either “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit” setting. BAND / OK
• [BAND] appears above the function switch (F-5). [DEL] [INS] F-5 Keypad
w Push [BAND] (F-5) to open the band edge screen.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
band edge.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select the upper and lower band
edge frequency entry cell.
• Push [INS] (MF6) to insert a new blank band edge line.
• Push and hold [DEL] (MF7) for 1 sec. to delete the
selected band edge line.
r Input the desired frequency with the keypad, then F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial
push [F-INP•ENT]. DEF
• Push [GENE •] to input decimal point (“.”) between the
MHz and kHz digits. • Band edge screen
• Program each channel from left to right and each fre-
quency must be higher than the preceding frequency.
• The frequency that is duplicated, or out of an amateur
band, cannot be programmed.
• If you want to return the band edge frequencies to their de-
fault (initial) value, push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec.
The band edge initialize screen appears, then push and
hold [OK] (F-5) for 1 sec. to initialize all band edge fre- NOTE: All frequency ranges are set in default. So
quency settings. you should delete or change it to add the desired
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode. band edge frequency.
31
BASIC OPERATION 3
■ Operating mode selection

SSB (USB/LSB), SSB data (USB data/LSB data),
CW, CW reverse (CW-R), RTTY, RTTY reverse
(RTTY-R), PSK, PSK reverse (PSK-R), AM, AM data,
FM and FM data modes are available in the IC-7600.
Push the desired mode switch to select a mode of
operation.
See the diagram as at right for the order of selection.

Mode switches
Microphone signals are muted when data mode is
selected depending on the set mode settings
(p. 124). USB-D1
SSB
LSB-D1 1
USB LSB
• Selecting SSB mode USB-D2 LSB-D2 2
➥ Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB.
USB-D3 LSB-D3
• USB is selected first when above 10 MHz; or LSB is
selected first when below 10 MHz operation.
3
• After USB or LSB is selected, push [SSB] to toggle
between USB and LSB.
CW
4
CW CW-R
• After USB or LSB is selected, push and hold [SSB]
for 1 sec. to select the USB or LSB data mode, respec-
5
tively.
6
RTTY/PSK
• After the USB or LSB data mode is selected, push
RTTY-R RTTY PSK PSK-R
and hold [SSB] for 1 sec. to select data 1, 2 and 3, in
sequence. 7
• In the USB or LSB data mode, push [SSB] to return to
the USB or LSB mode, respectively.
AM-D1
AM/FM
FM-D1
8
AM FM
• Selecting CW mode
➥ Push [CW] to select CW.
AM-D2 FM-D2 9
• After CW is selected, push [CW] to toggle between the
CW and CW reverse mode.
AM-D3 FM-D3
10
• Selecting RTTY/PSK mode : Push mode switch momentary. 11
➥ Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY or PSK. : Push and hold mode switch for 1 sec.
• After RTTY or PSK is selected, push [RTTY/PSK] to 12
toggle between RTTY and PSK.
• A fter RTTY or PSK is selected, push and hold 13
[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and
RTTY reverse, or, PSK and PSK reverse mode,
respectively.
14
• Selecting AM/FM mode 15
➥ Push [AM/FM] to select AM or FM.
• After AM or FM is selected, push [AM/FM] to toggle 16
between AM and FM.
• After AM or FM is selected, push and hold [AM/FM] for
1 sec. to select AM or FM data mode, respectively.
17
• A fter AM or FM data mode is selected, push and
hold [AM/FM] for 1 sec. to select data 1, 2 and 3, in
18
sequence.
• In AM or FM data mode, push [AM/FM] to return to the 19
AM or FM mode, respectively.
20
21
32
3 BASIC OPERATION
■ Squelch and receive (RF) sensitivity

Adjusts the RF gain and squelch threshold level.
The squelch removes noise output from the speaker
(closed position) when no signal is received.
• The squelch is particularly effective for AM and FM. It is
also available for other modes.
• 12 to 1 o’clock position is recommended for any setting of
the [RF/SQL] control.
• The control can be set as ‘Auto’ (RF gain control in SSB,
[RF/SQL]
CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch control in AM and FM)
or squelch control (RF gain is fixed at maximum) in the
Others set mode, as follows. (p. 128)
SET MODE OPERATION

Can be used in all modes.
RF+SQL Functions as noise squelch or S-meter
• When setting as RF gain/squelch control
(default) squelch in the FM modes; S-meter
Noise squelch (FM mode)
squelch only in other modes.
Squelch is Recommended level
Operates as a squelch control. open.
SQL • RF gain is fixed at maximum sensitivity. Maximum
RF gain
Operates as an RF gain control in the RF gain
SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK modes. adjustable S-meter
• Squelch is fixed open. range squelch
AUTO
Operates as a squelch control in the
AM and FM modes.
• When functioning as RF gain control
• RF gain is fixed at maximum sensitivity.
(Squelch is fixed open; SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK only)
❍ Adjusting RF gain (Receive sensitivity)

Maximum
Normally, [RF/SQL] is set to the 11 o’clock position. Adjustable RF gain
Rotate [RF/SQL] to the 11 o’clock position for maxi- range
mum sensitivity. Minimum RF gain
• Rotating counterclockwise from the maximum position
reduces sensitivity.
• The S-meter indicates receive sensitivity. • When functioning as squelch control
(RF gain is fixed at maximum.)
❍ Adjusting squelch (Removing non-signal noise) Noise squelch (FM mode)
Rotate [RF/SQL] clockwise when receiving no signal, Noise squelch
S-meter squelch
until the noise just disappears. threshold
threshold
• [RX] indicator light goes out. (FM mode)
•R otating [RF/SQL] past the threshold point invokes the S-
Squelch is S-meter
meter squelch— this allows you to set a minimum signal open. squelch
level needed to open the squelch.
Shallow Deep
While rotating the RF gain control, noise may be

33
BASIC OPERATION 3
■ Volume setting
➥ Rotate [AF] control clockwise to increase the audio
output level, counterclockwise to decrease it.
Increases
Decreases [AF]
■ Meter Display selection 1

The transceiver has 6 transmit meter functions for
your convenience.
2
➥ Push [METER] (MF2) several times to select the
3
desired meter.
4
Displays the RF output power in % (per-
cent). 5
METER
6
Displays the SWR on the transmission
line. 7
Displays the ALC level. When the meter Power level readout SWR readout 8
movement shows the input signal level
exceeds the allowable level, the ALC
limits the RF power. In such cases,
9
reduce the [MIC GAIN] control. ALC level readout Compression level 10
readout
Displays the compression level when the
speech compressor is in use.
11
Displays the drain current of the final 12
ID readout VD readout
amplifier MOSFETs.
13
Displays the drain terminal voltage of the
final amplifier MOSFETs. 14
15
D Multi-function digital meter
The IC-7600 can display the multi-function digital 16
meter on the LCD display. This meter displays all
transmit parameters simultaneously. 17
q Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec. to turn METER F-1 EXIT/SET
18
the multi-function digital meter ON.
19
P-HOLD
w Push [P-HOLD] (F-1) to toggle the peak level hold
function ON.
“P-HOLD” indicator
• “P-HOLD” appears on the window title when the peak
level hold function is ON.
20
e Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec., or push
[EXIT/SET] to turn the multi-function digital meter
21
OFF.
34
3 BASIC OPERATION
D Meter type selection

A total of 3 meter types are available in the IC-7600— DISP SET
Standard, Edgewise and Bar meters. F-3 F-6
Follow the instructions below for the meter type selec-
tion.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to return to the nor-

mal screen, if necessary.
w Push [SET] (F-6), then push [DISP] (F-3) to select
the display set mode.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Meter type F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial
(Normal Screen)” item.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired meter
type between “Standard,” “Edgewise” and “Bar.”
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the display set mode.
• Standard meter
• Edgewise meter
• Bar meter
■ Voice synthesizer operation

The IC-7600 has a built-in voice synthesizer to
announce the operating frequency, mode* and
S-meter* in clear, electronically-generated voice, in
English (or Japanese).
First, select the desired parameters to be announced,

such as audio level, speed, language, contents, in the
Others set mode. (p. 131)
➥ Push [SPEECH/LOCK] to announce the currently

selected frequency, mode* and S-meter level*.
➥ Push a mode switch to announce the appropriate
mode*.
* The S-meter level and operating mode announcements

can be deactivated, respectively. (p.131)
SPEECH
NOTE: When “LOCK/SPEECH” is selected in LOCK
[[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch] item in the Others set
mode, pushing and holding [SPEECH/LOCK] acti-
vates the voice synthesizer. (p. 131)
35
BASIC OPERATION 3
■ Basic transmit operation

Before transmitting, monitor your selected
operating frequency to make sure transmitting
won’t cause interference to other stations on
the same frequency. It’s good amateur practice
to listen first, and then, even if nothing is heard,
ask “Is the frequency in use?” once or twice,
before you begin operating on that frequency.
D Transmitting
efore transmitting, monitor your selected operat-
B 1
ing frequency to make sure transmitting won’t cause
interference to other stations on the same frequency. 2
q Push [TRANSMIT] or [PTT] (microphone) to trans-
TRANSMIT [TX] indicator
3
mit.
• The [TX] indicator lights red.
• “ ” appears while transmitting.
4
w Push [TRANSMIT] again or release [PTT] (micro-
phone) to return to receive.
5
✔ Adjusting the transmit output power
6
➥ Rotate [RF POWER].
• Adjustable range : 2 W to 100 W [RF POWER]
7
(The AM mode: 1 W to 30 W)
Increases 8
max. 100 W
Decreases
(30 W for AM) 9
Push min. 2 W
(1 W for AM) 10
11
D Microphone gain adjustment
12
efore transmitting, monitor your selected operat-
B
interference to other stations on the same frequency. METER
13
q Push [SSB] to select the SSB mode.
14
w Push [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter.
e Push [PTT] (microphone) to transmit. 15
• Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level.
r W hile talking into the microphone, rotate 16
[MIC GAIN] so that the ALC meter reading doesn’t
go outside the ALC zone. (see at right) [MIC GAIN] SSB 17
Increases
ALC zone 18
Push Decreases
19
t Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive. 20
Recommended level for
an Icom microphone
In addition, the transceiver can display the multi-func- 21
tion digital meter in the LCD, which displays all trans-
mit meters simultaneously. MIC GAIN
36
3 BASIC OPERATION
D Drive gain adjustment

The drive gain is active for all modes, other than the
SSB mode with speech compressor OFF.
Before transmitting, monitor your selected operat-

interference to other stations on the same frequency.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to return to the nor- SET

mal screen, if necessary. TRANSMIT METER F-6
w P ush [SET] (F-6), then push [LEVEL] (F-1) to
select the level set mode.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Drive Gain”
item.
r Push [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter.
t Push [PTT] (microphone; SSB with [COMP] ON,
AM or FM), key down (CW) or push [TRANSMIT]
(RTTY or PSK) to transmit. F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial
y While talking into the microphone, keying down or LEVEL /
transmitting, rotate the main dial so that the ALC
meter reading is within 30% to 50% of the ALC Drive gain range
scale. (p. 36)
• Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level.
u Release [PTT], stop keying or push [TRANSMIT]
again to return to receive.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the display set mode.
37
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
■ Functions for CW operation
D About CW reverse mode
CW-R (CW Reverse) mode uses the opposite side
band to receive CW signals.
Use when interfering signals are near a desired sig- Push
nal and you want to use CW-R to reduce the interfer-
ence.
BFO BFO
➥ During the CW mode, push [CW] to select the CW Interference Desired signal Interference Desired signal
or CW-R mode.
CW mode (LSB side) CW-R mode (USB side)
D About CW pitch control

1
The received CW audio pitch and CW sidetone can 2
be adjusted to suit your preference (from 300 to
900 Hz; in 5 Hz steps). This does not change the
operating frequency.
3
➥ Rotate [CW PITCH] to suit your preference.
4
• Adjustable from 300 to 900 Hz.
[CW PITCH] 5
The filter set screen graphically displays the CW
pitch operations. (See at right.)
Higher pitch
6
➥ Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to access the
filter set screen. 7
• The CW pitch frequency is graphically changed in Lower pitch
5 Hz steps when the selected IF filter passband
width is below 500Hz (“ ” appears), or in 25 Hz
• Filter set screen 8
steps when the selected IF filter passband width is
above 600Hz (“ ” disappears). 9
• Push [EXIT/SET] or push and hold [FILTER] for 1
sec. to return to the previous screen. 10
CW pitch frequency (e.g. 700 Hz) 11
D CW sidetone function
When the transceiver is in receive (and the break-in 12
function is OFF— p. 85) you can listen to the CW sid-
etone without actually transmitting. 13
This allows you to match your transmit frequency 14
exactly to another station’s by matching the audio
tone. You can also use the CW sidetone (be sure to 15
turn OFF break-in!) to practice CW sending.
CW sidetone level can be adjusted in the level set
mode (p. 122).
16
q P ush [SET] (F-6), then push [LEVEL] (F-1) to
17
select the level set mode.
w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the “Side
18
Tone Level” item.
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the sidetone level. 19
• Sidetone level is adjustable within 0 to 100 % in 1%
steps. 20
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the display set mode. Main dial
Matching the frequency of a transmitted and
F-1
LEVEL /
F-2 F-6
SET
EXIT/SET
21
received signal is called “Zero beat.”
38
4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation

The APF changes the audio frequency response by
boosting a particular frequency to enhance a desired
CW signal.
q During the CW mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the

audio peak filter ON or OFF.
• “ ” appears in the display and the indicator on this
switch lights green when the audio peak filter is ON.
APF/TPF
w Push and hold [APF/TPF] for 1 sec. several times
to select the desired audio filter width.
• WIDE, MID and NAR filters, or 320, 160 and 80 Hz fil-
ters are selectable, depending on [APF type] item set-
ting in the Others set mode. (p. 133)
The APF (Audio Peak Filter) type is also selectable

from “SOFT” and “SHARP” in [APF type] item in the
Others set mode (p. 133).
39
■ Electronic keyer functions

The IC-7600 has a number of convenient functions for
the built-in electronic keyer that can be accessed from
the memory keyer menu.
q During the CW mode, push [EXIT/SET] several KEYER / 001

times to return to the normal screen, if necessary. F-3
w Push [KEYER] (F-3) to select the memory keyer
screen.
e Push [EXIT/SET] to select the memory keyer menu
screen.
r Push [SEND] (F-1), [EDIT] (F-2), [001] (F-3) or
[CW KEY] (F-4) to select the desired menu. See 1
the diagram below.
• Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous display. F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET 2
SEND EDIT CW KEY
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
• Memory keyer screen (p. 41) • Memory keyer edit screen (p. 42) 10
11
12
EXIT/SET F-1 F-2 13
• Memory keyer menu screen • Contest number set mode (p. 43) 14
15
16
17
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-3
• Keyer set mode screen (p. 44) 18

19
20
F-4 21
40
D Memory keyer screen

Pre-set characters can be sent using the keyer send
menu. Contents of the memory keyer are set using the
edit menu.
• Transmitting
q During the CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-3) KEYER −1
to select the memory keyer screen. TRANSMIT F-3 F-5
w Push [TRANSMIT] to set the transceiver to trans-
mit, or set the break-in function ON (p. 85).
e Push one of the function keys ([M1] (F-1) to [M4] (F-
4)) to send the contents of the memory keyer.
• Push and hold a function key that is pushed in step q
for 1 sec., or push [REPEAT] (F-6) while sending the
contents of the memory keyer to send repeatedly; push
any function key to cancel the transmission.
EXIT/SET
•“ ” appears while transmitting repeatedly. F-1 F-4
—
• The contest serial number counter counts each time the M1 M4
contents are sent.
• Push [−1] (F-5) to reduce the contest serial number • Memory keyer screen
count by 1 before sending the contents of the memory
Count up trigger
keyer to a station a second time.
• “M1”–“M4” are highlighted while transmitting.
• Set the repeat interval of the memory keyer to 1–60 sec.
(1 sec. steps). See p. 44 for the keyer set mode.
r Push [EXIT/SET] twice to return to the the normal
screen.
During transmitting:
For your information
When an external keypad or keyboard is connected, Appears while transmitting repeatedly.
the programmed contents, M1 to M4, can be trans-
mitted without selecting the memory keyer screen.
See pgs. 18, 133, 134 for details.
•T he programmed contents, M1 to M4, are trans-
mitted once when momentarily pushing one of
four switches on the external keypad that is con-
nected to [MIC] connector on the front panel; the Appears while transmitting.
programmed contents are transmitted repeatedly
when pushing and holding a switch.
• The programmed contents, M1 to M4, are trans-
mitted once when pushing one of [F1] to [F4] key
of the keyboard that is connected to the [USB] (A)
connector on the front panel; the programmed con-
tents are transmitted repeatedly when pushing a
key while pushing and holding the [SHIFT] key.
41
D Editing a memory keyer

The contents of the memory keyer memories can be M1..M4
set, using the memory keyer edit menu. The memory F-6
keyer can memorize and re-transmit 4 CW key codes
for often-used CW sentences, contest serial numbers,
etc. Total capacity of the memory keyer is 70 charac-
ters per memory channel.
• Programming contents
q During the CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-
3) to select memory keyer screen. F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET
w Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu, EDIT KEYER
then push [EDIT] (F-2) to select keyer edit screen.
• Memory keyer contents of Channel 1 (M1) is selected. 123
1
e Push [M1..M4] (F-6) several times to select the Keypad
desired memory keyer channel to be edited.
Symbol ABC
2
r P ush [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) to
select the character group, then rotate the main 3
dial to select the character, or push the keypad for
number input. 4
• [Symbol] appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when
“123” character group is selected.
• Selectable characters (using the main dial);
5
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 Main dial
Key selection Characters DEL SPACE 6
A to Z (capital letters)
• Memory keyer edit screen 7
0 to 9 (numbers) 8
/?^ .,@✱
9
10
NOTE:
“^” is used to transmit a string of characters with no
11
inter-character space. Put “^” before a text string
such as ^AR, and the string “ar ” is sent with no 12
space. • Example— entered “QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST”
“✱” is used to insert the CW contest serial num- into memory keyer channel 3 13
ber. The serial number automatically increments by
1. This function is available only for one memory 14
keyer channel at a time. Memory keyer channel M2
uses “✱” by default. 15
t Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) to move the cursor • Pre-programmed contents 16
backwards or forwards, respectively.
• Pushing [DEL] (F-3) deletes a character and [SPACE]
(F-4) inserts a space.
CH Contents
17
M1 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST
y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired char-
acters.
M2 UR 5NN✱ BK 18
M3 CFM TU
u Push [EXIT/SET] twice to return to the normal
screen. M4 QRZ? 19
✔ For your convenience 20
When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] (A) con-
nector on the front panel, the memory keyer contents 21
can also be edited from the keyboard.
42
D Contest number set mode

This menu is used to set the contest (serial) number • Contest number set mode screen
and count-up trigger, etc. KEYER / 001 DEF / 001CLR
F-3 F-4
• Setting contents
q During the CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-3)
to select memory keyer screen.
w Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu,
then push [001] (F-3) to select the contest serial
number set mode.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired set
item. F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the default
condition or value.
t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to return to the normal
screen.
Number Style Normal

This item sets the numbering system used for con- • Normal : Does not use short morse numbers
test (serial) numbers— normal or short morse num- (default)
bers. • 190➔ANO : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O.
• 190➔ANT : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T.
hort morse numbers are also referred to as “cut”
S • 90➔ NO : Sets 9 as N and 0 as O.
numbers. • 90➔ NT : Sets 9 as N and 0 as T.
Count Up Trigger M2
The count-up trigger allows the contest serial num- • M1, M2, M3 and M4 can be set. (default: M2)
ber to automatically increment after each complete
serial number exchange is sent.
Present Number 001

This item shows the current number for the count-up • Rotate the main dial to change the number, or
trigger channel set above. push and hold [001CLR] (F-4) for 1 sec. to reset
the current number to 001.
43
D Keyer set mode

This set mode is used to set the memory keyer repeat DEF / CW KEY
time, dash weight, paddle specifications, keyer type, F-4
etc.
q During the CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-3)
to select the memory keyer screen.
w Push [EXIT/SET] to select the memory keyer menu,
then push [CW KEY] (F-4) to select the keyer set
mode. F-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET Main dial
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired set KEYER
item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial. • Keyer set mode screen
1
condition or value. 2
t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to return to the normal
screen. 3
4
5
Keyer Repeat Time 2s
When sending CW using the repeat timer, this item • 1 to 60 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be selected. 6
sets the time between transmission. (default: 2 sec.)
7
Dot/Dash Ratio 1:1:3.0 8
This item sets the dot/dash ratio. • 1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5 (in 0.1 steps) can be selected.
(default: 1:1:3.0) 9
Keying weight example: Morse code “K”
DOT (fixed*) 10
Weight setting: DASH DASH
1:1:3 (default) 11
Weight setting:
Adjusted
12
Adjustable range SPACE (fixed*)
*SPACE and DOT length can be

13
adjusted with [KEY SPEED] only.
14
Rise Time 4ms 15
This item sets the rise time of the transmitted CW
envelope.
• 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 msec. can be selected.
(default: 4 msec.)
16
• About rise time
Tx
ey clicks on nearby frequencies can be generated
K 17
Key action if the rise time of a CW waveform is too short.
Rx 18
Tx output power Set Tx power level 19
0
Time
20
Rise time
21
☞ Continued on the next page.
44
D Keyer set mode (continued)
Paddle Polarity Normal

This item sets the paddle dot-dash polarity. • Normal and reverse polarity can be selected.
Keyer Type ELEC-KEY

This item selects the keyer type for the [ELEC-KEY] • Straight key, BUG-KEY and ELEC-KEY can be
connector on the front panel. selected. (default: ELEC-KEY)
MIC Up/Down Keyer OFF

(Microphone’s [UP]/[DN] switches keyer) • ON : [UP]/[DN] switches can be used for CW.
This item allows you to set the microphone [UP]/ • OFF : [UP]/[DN] switches cannot be used for CW.
[DN] switches to be used as a paddle. (The micro-
phone [UP]/[DN] switches do not work as a NOTE: When “ON” is selected, the frequency and
‘squeeze key.’) memory channel cannot be changed using the
[UP]/[DN] switches.
45
■ RTTY (FSK) operation

A DSP-based high-quality Baudot RTTY encoder/
decoder is built-in to the IC-7600. When connecting
a PC keyboard (pgs. 18, 19), RTTY operation can be
performed without an external RTTY terminal, TNC or
PC.
If you would rather use your RTTY terminal or TNC,
consult the manual that comes with the RTTY termi-
nal or TNC.
[TX] [RX] DECODE
q Push a band key to select the desired band. indicator indicator F-3 Band keys
w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY.
• A fter the RTTY mode is selected, push and hold 1
[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between the RTTY
and RTTY-R modes.
• “RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears.
2
• The RTTY tuning indicator appears.
e P ush [DECODE] (F-3) to display the decode
3
screen.
• The IC-7600 has a built-in Baudot decoder.
RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET Main dial 4
r To tune the desired signal, aim for a symmetrical
waveform and ensure the peak points align with
Appears Appears
5
the mark (2125 Hz) and shift (170 Hz) frequency
lines in the FFT scope. 6
• The S-meter displays the received signal strength,
when a signal is received. 7
t Press [F12] on the connected PC’s keyboard to
transmit. 8
• [TX] indicator lights red.
y Type on the keyboard to enter the contents that
you want to transmit.
9
• The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer
screen and transmitted immediately. 10
• The text color will change when transmitted.
• Press one of [F1]–[F8] on the keyboard to transmit the
TX buffer screen
11
TX memory contents. 2125/170
u Press [F12] on the keyboard to return to receive. FFT scope 12

TX/RX contents screen
✔ For your convenience

Water-fall
1905 2515
13
The transmission contents can be typed before being
transmitted.
14
q Perform the steps q to r above. 15
w Type on the connected keyboard to enter the mes-
sage that you want to transmit. 16
• The typewritten contents are displayed on the TX buf-
fer screen. 17
e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit
the typewritten contents. 18
• The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will
change when transmitted.
• To cancel the transmission, press [F12] twice.
19
r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.
20
21
46
D About RTTY reverse mode

Received characters are occasionally garbled when
the received signal is reversed between Mark and
Space tones. This reversal can be caused by incor-
rect TNC connections, setting, commands, etc.
To receive a reversed RTTY signals correctly, select Normal Reverse

the RTTY-R (RTTY Reverse) mode. 170 Hz 2125 Hz 2125 Hz 170 Hz
➥ During the RTTY mode, push and hold [RTTY/

PSK] for 1 sec. to select the RTTY-R mode.
• Check the received signal. Space Mark BFO BFO Space Mark
D Twin peak filter

The twin peak filter changes the audio frequency
response by boosting the mark and space frequen-
cies (2125 and 2295 Hz) for better reception of RTTY
signals.
➥ During the RTTY mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn

the twin peak filter ON or OFF.
• “ ” appears in the LCD and the indicator on
this switch lights green while the filter is in use.
NOTE: When the twin peak filter is in use, the

received audio output may increase. This is a nor-
mal, not a malfunction. APF/TPF
47
D Functions of the RTTY decoder display

q Push a band key to select the desired band. DECODE WIDE
w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY. F-3 F-6 Band keys
• After RTTY is selected, push and hold [RTTY/PSK]
for 1 sec. to toggle between the RTTY and RTTY-R
modes.
• “RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears.
screen.
• When tuned into an RTTY signal, decoded characters
are displayed in the RX contents screen.
r P ush [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) to freeze the current F-2 RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET
screen. HOLD/CLR
• “ ” appears while the function is in use.
• Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) again to cancel the function.
1
• RTTY Decode screen (Normal)
t Push and hold [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) for 1 sec. to
clear the displayed characters.
2
• The “ ” indicator disappears at the same time as
the displayed characters are cleared. (The hold function 3
is cancelled.)
y Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the RTTY decode 4
screen size between normal and wide.
• The S/RF meter type during wide screen display can 5
be selected in the display set mode. (p. 129)
u P ush [EXIT/SET] to close the RTTY decode
screen.
6
• RTTY Decode screen (Wide) 7
8
9
10
11
12
D Setting the decoder threshold level 13
Adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level if some
characters are displayed when no signal is received. 14
q S elect the RTTY decode screen as described 15
above.
w Push [ADJ] (F-4) to select the threshold level set-
ting condition. F-4 F-5 Main dial 16
17
ADJ DEF
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the RTTY decoder
threshold level.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-5) for 1 sec. to select the
default setting. 18
r Push [ADJ] (F-4) to exit from the threshold level
setting condition. 19
The UnShift On Space (USOS) function and new Threshold level indication bar 20
line code can be set in the RTTY set mode.
(p. 51) 21
48
D RTTY memory transmission

Previously entered characters can be sent using the
RTTY memory. Contents of the memory are set using
the edit menu.
q During the RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE]

DECODE / TX MEM 1–4/5–8
F-3 F-6
(F-3) to select the RTTY decode screen.
w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select the RTTY memory
screen.
e Push [1–4/5–8] (F-6) to select the memory bank,
and then push one of the function keys ([RT1] (F-1)
to [RT4] (F-4) or [RT5] (F-1) to [RT8] (F-4)).
• When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory
contents will be transmitted immediately.
• When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents F-1 F-4 F-1 F-4
will be transmitted immediately when [F1] to [F8] on – or –
RT1 RT4 RT5 RT8
the connected keyboard is pressed, or transmitted after
[F12] is pressed, depending on auto transmission/
reception setting (see below). • RTTY memory screen
• The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time
may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on
setting.

When an external keypad is connected to [MIC]
connector on the front panel, one of RT1 to RT4
RTTY memory contents can be transmitted while
the RTTY decode screen is selected in the RTTY
mode. (pgs. 18, 133)
D Automatic transmission/reception setting

q During the RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE] DECODE / TX MEM RT1..RT8
(F-3) to select the RTTY decode screen. F-3 F-6
screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the RTTY
memory edit screen.
• R TTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) is
selected.
e Push [RT1..RT8] (F-6) several times to select the
desired RTTY memory.
r Push [AUTO TX] (F-5) several times to select the
F-5 EXIT/SET
desired operating option as follow.
• AUTO TX/RX : Automatically transmits the selected EDIT / AUTO TX
memory contents, and returns to

receive after the transmission. Auto TX/RX settings
• AUTO TX : A utomatically transm its the
selected memory contents. To
return to receive, press [F12] on
the keyboard.
• AUTO RX : P ress [F12] on the keyboard
to transmit the selected memory
contents. Automatically returns to
receive after the transmission. OTE: The transceiver always functions in the
N
• No indication : P ress [F12] on the keyboard “AUTO TX/RX” setting when no keyboard is con-
to transmit the selected memory nected.
contents, and press [F12] again
to return to receive.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the RTTY memory edit
condition.
49
D Editing RTTY memory

The contents of the RTTY memories can be set using
the memory edit menu. The memory can store and
re-transmit 8 RTTY message for often-used RTTY
information. Total capacity of the memory is 70 char-
acters per memory channel.
DECODE / TX MEM RT1..RT8
F-3 F-6
screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the RTTY
memory edit screen.
• RTTY memory contents of Channel 1 (RT1) is selected. 1
e Push [RT1..RT8] (F-6) several times to select the
desired RTTY memory channel to be edited. 2
r P ush [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) to
select the character group, then rotate the main F-5 EXIT/SET 3
dial to select the character, or push the keypad for EDIT
number input. 4
• [Symbol] (MF7) appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed 123
when “123” character group is selected.
• Selectable characters (using the main dial);
Symbol ABC Keypad
5
Key selection Characters 6
A to Z (capital letters) 7
0 to 9 (numbers) 8
!$&?"’–/.,:;()↵
F-1 F-2 F-3
DEL SPACE
F-4 Main dial
9
10
• RTTY memory edit screen
t Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) to move the cursor
11
(F-4) inserts a space. 12
acters. 13
u Push [EXIT/SET] to set the contents and exit the
RTTY memory edit screen.
• Pre-programmed contents
14
CH Contents 15
✔ For your convenience RT1 ↵DE ICOM ICOM K↵
When a PC keyboard is connected to the [USB] RT2 ↵DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K↵ 16
connector on the front panel, the RTTY memory RT3 ↵QSL UR 599–599 BK↵
contents can also be edited from the keyboard.
RT4 ↵QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599–599 BK↵ 17
RT5 ↵73 GL SK↵
RT6 ↵CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K↵ 18
↵MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC–7600 & ANTENNA
RT7
IS A 3–ELEMENT TRIBAND YAGI.↵ 19
↵MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS INTERNAL FSK
RT8
UNIT & DEMODULATOR OF THE IC–7600.↵ 20
21
50
D RTTY decode set mode

This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-
tion, time stamp setting, etc. DEF SET WIDE
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the second RTTY
decode menu, then push [SET] (F-5) to select the
RTTY decode set mode.
• Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the screen size between
normal and wide.
e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired set
F-1 F-3 EXIT/SET Main dial
<MENU1> DECODE
item.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default • RTTY decode set mode screen
condition or value.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select the set contents for some
items.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from the set mode.
RTTY FFT Scope Averaging OFF

Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function Recommendation!
from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF) If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning,
the default or smaller averaging setting is recom-
mended.
RTTY FFT Scope Waveform Color 51 153 255

Set the color for the FFT scope waveform. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
• The color is set in RGB format. B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
• The set color is shown in the box beside the RGB ratio from 0 to 255.
scale.
RTTY Decode USOS ON

Turn the capability of letter code decoding after • ON : Decode as a letter code.
receiving a “space” (USOS; UnShift On Space func- • OFF : Decode as a character code.
tion) ON or OFF.
RTTY Decode New Line Code CR,LF,CR+LF

Selects the new line code of the internal RTTY • CR,LF,CR+LF : Makes a new line with any codes.
decoder. • CR+LF : M akes a new line with CR+LF
CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed code only.
RTTY Diddle BLANK

Selects the diddle condition. • OFF : Turns the diddle function OFF.
• BLANK : T ransmits blank code during no code
transmission.
• LTRS : T ransmits letter code during no code
transmission.
51
RTTY TX USOS ON
Explicitly inserts the FIGS character, even though it • ON : Inserts FIGS.
is not required by the receiving station. • OFF : Does not insert FIGS.
RTTY Auto CR+LF by TX ON

Selects the automatic new line code (CR+LF) trans- • ON : Transmits CR+LF code once.
mission capability. • OFF : Transmits no CR+LF code.
RTTY Time Stamp ON

Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception • ON : Displays the time stamp. 1
time) indication ON or OFF. • OFF : No time stamp indication.
2
RTTY Time Stamp (Time) Local
Selects the clock indication for time stamp usage. • Local : Selects the time that is set in “Time (Now).”
3
NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF”
• UTC* : Selects the time that is set in “CLOCK2.”
*The name of choice may differ, accord-
4
is selected in “RTTY Time Stamp,” as explained ing to “CLOCK2 Name” setting (p. 115).
above. “UTC” is the default name of CLOCK2. 5
RTTY Time Stamp (Frequency) OFF
6
Selects the operating frequency display for time • ON : Displays the operating frequency. 7
stamp usage. • OFF : No operating frequency display.
8
NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when “OFF”
is selected in “RTTY Time Stamp,” as explained above. 9
RTTY Font Color (Receive) 128 255 128 10
Set the text color for received characters. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
• The color is set in RGB format. B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the 11
scale. 12
RTTY Font Color (Transmit) 255 106 106
13
Set the text color for transmitted characters. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and 14
• The set color is shown in the box beside the RGB
scale.
ratio from 0 to 255. 15
16
RTTY Font Color (Time Stamp) 0 155 189
Set the text color for time stamp indication. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and 17
• The set color is shown in the box beside the RGB ratio from 0 to 255. 18
scale.
19
RTTY Font Color (TX Buffer) 255 255 255
20
Set the text color in the TX buffer screen. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
• The color is set in RGB format. B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the 21
scale.
52
D Data saving
The contents of the RTTY memory/received signal The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom.
can be saved into USB-Memory.
q D uring the RTTY decode screen display, push 123 DEL SPACE
[<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the RTTY decode sec- Symbol ABC F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4
ond menu.
w Push [SAVE] (F-4) to select the decode file save
screen.
e Change the following conditions, if desired.
• File name:
z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select the file name edit
option.
• Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
x Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) <MENU1> / DIR/FILE SAVE / EDIT
to select the character group, then rotate the

• Decode file save screen— file name edit
main dial to select the character.
• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^
_
– ( ) { } _ @ can be selected.
• P ush [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push
[≈] (F-2) to move the cursor right, [DEL] (F-3)
delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to
insert a space.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to store the file name.
• File format
z Push and hold [SAVE/OPT] (F-5) for 1 sec. to
select the save option screen.
x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-
mat between Text to HTML.
• “Text” is the default setting.
DEF SAVE/OPT
default setting.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous display.
• Saving location
z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select the tree view
MAKE REN DEL F-2 F-3 F-4
screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder on the
USB-Memory.
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-4) to select the upper directory.
• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select folder in the
same directory.
• Push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a
folder in the directory.
• Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder. F-1 F-5
• Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. to delete
DIR/FILE SAVE/OPT
the folder.
• Push and hold [MAKE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to mak-
ing a new folder. (Edit the name in the same man- • Save option screen
ner as the “• File name” above.)
c Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) twice to select the file
name.
r Push [SAVE/OPT] (F-5).
• After saving is completed, automatically returns to the
RTTY decode second menu.
✔ For your convenience! When a PC keyboard is connected to the [USB] (A) con-
Two data formats, Text and HTML, are available for nector on the front panel, the file name can also be edited
PC data storage. from the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is required.
53
■ PSK operation
A high-quality DSP-based PSK encoder/decoder is
built-in to the IC-7600. When connecting a PC key-
board (pgs. 18, 19), PSK operation can be performed [TX] [RX] DECODE
without PSK software installed on your PC. indicator indicator F-3 Band keys
If desired, you can also use your PSK software; con-
sult the manual that comes with the software.
q Push a band key to select the desired band.

w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select PSK.
• A fter the PSK mode is selected, push and hold
[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between the PSK and
PSK-R modes.
RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET Main dial 1
• “PSK” or “PSK-R” appears.
screen.
Appears 2
• The IC-7600 has a built-in PSK decoder.
r Tune to the desired signal with the main dial. 3
• The signal is properly tuned when the radiated lines
in the vector tuning indicator narrow, as show in the 4
example below.
• The radiated lines in the vector tuning indicator may be 5
displayed sporadically.
• When a PSK signal is received, the water-fall display is
activated.
6
• The water-fall display shows the signals within the pass-
band. Received PSK signals appear as vertical lines. 7
t Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit.
• [TX] indicator lights red. 8
y Type on the connected keyboard to enter the mes- TX buffer screen
9
1500
sage that you want to transmit.
FFT scope
• The typewritten contents are displayed in the TX buffer
RX contents screen
screen and transmitted immediately.
• The text color will change when transmitted. Water-fall
1195 1805 10
• Press one of [F1]–[F8] to transmit the TX memory con- Vector tuning indicator
tents. 11
u Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.
• Vector tuning indicator display example 12
Tuned BPSK signal Tuned QPSK signal
✔ For your convenience 13
The transmission contents can be typed before being
transmitted. 14
q Perform the steps q to r above.
w Type on the connected keyboard to enter the mes- BPSK/QPSK idle signal Unmodulated signal
15
sage that you want to transmit.
• The message is shown in the TX buffer screen.
16
e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit
the message. 17
• The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will
be changed when transmitted. 18
• To cancel the transmission, press [F12] twice.
r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive. 19
20
21
54
D About BPSK and QPSK modes

The BPSK and QPSK modes are available for PSK.
• The BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying) mode is the
most commonly used mode.
• The QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) mode
has error correction capability to provide better
decoding than the BPSK mode in marginal condi-
tion. However, more accurate tuning is required with F-1 F-2 F-3
the QPSK mode, due to the tight phase margin of <MENU1> B/QPSK DECODE
QPSK.
q During the PSK mode selection, push [DECODE] • PSK decode screen— the BPSK mode
(F-3) to display the PSK decode screen.
Appears
w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the PSK decode
second menu.
e Push [B/QPSK] (F-2) to toggle between the BPSK
and QPSK mode alternately.
• PSK decode screen— the QPSK mode

Appears
55
D Functions of the PSK decoder display

q Push a band key to select the desired band.
w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select PSK. DECODE AFC/NET WIDE
• After the PSK mode is selected, push and hold [RTTY/ F-3 F-5 F-6 Band keys
PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between the PSK and PSK-R
modes.
• “PSK” or “PSK-R” appears.
e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to display the decode
screen.
• When tuned into a PSK signal, decoded characters are
displayed in the RX contents screen.
r P ush [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) to freeze the current
screen. F-2 RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET

• Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) again to release the function.
HOLD/CLR
1
t Push and hold [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) for 1 sec. to
clear the displayed characters.
• AFC/NET indications
2
• The “ ” indicator disappears at the same time as
the displayed characters are cleared. (The hold function 3
is cancelled.)
y P ush [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the PSK decode 4
screen size between normal and wide.
• S/RF meter type during wide screen display can be 5
selected in the display set mode. (p. 129)
u Push [AFC/NET] (F-5) to turn the AFC function
ON.
6
• “ ” appears.
• If a PSK signal is received within the AFC tuning range, 7
the decoder automatically tunes into the signal and the
offset frequency is displayed.
“AFC” and “NET” Offset frequency
indicators 8
• The AFC tuning range is set to ±15 Hz as the default.
Optional ±8 Hz setting is available in the PSK decode
set mode. (p. 59)
9
NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal 10
properly when a weak PSK signal is received.
11
i Push [AFC/NET] (F-5) again to turn the NET func-
tion ON. 12
• “ ” appears.
o Push and hold [AFC/NET] (F-5) for 1 sec. to add
the offset frequency to the displayed frequency.
13
!0 Push [EXIT/SET] to close the PSK decode screen.
14
D Setting the decoder threshold level
15
djust the PSK decoder threshold level if some char-
A
acters are displayed when no signal is received.
16
q C all up the PSK decode screen as described
17
above.
w Push [ADJ] (F-4) to select the threshold level set- F-4 F-5 Main dial
18
ting condition.
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the PSK decoder
ADJ DEF
19
threshold level.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-5) for 1 sec. to select the 20
default setting.
r Push [ADJ] (F-4) to exit from the threshold level 21
setting condition.
Threshold level indication bar
56
D PSK memory transmission

Previously entered characters can be sent using the
PSK memory. Contents of the memory are set using
the edit menu.
q During the PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] DECODE / TX MEM 1–4/5–8
(F-3) to select the PSK decode screen. F-3 F-6
w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select the PSK memory
screen.
e Push [1–4/5–8] (F-6) to select memory bank then
push one of the function keys ([PT1] (F-1) to
[PT4] (F-4) or [PT5] (F-1) to [PT8] (F-4)).
• When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory
contents will be transmitted immediately.
• When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents
F-1 F-4 F-1 F-4
will be transmitted immediately when [F1] to [F8] on – or –
PT1 PT4 PT5 PT8
the connected keyboard is pressed, or transmitted after
[F12] is pressed, depending on auto transmission/
reception setting (see below).
• The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time
may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on
setting.

When an external keypad is connected to [MIC]
connector on the front panel, one of PT1 to PT4
PSK memory contents can be transmitted while
the PSK decode screen is selected in PSK mode.
(pgs. 18, 133)
D Automatic transmission/reception setting

q During the PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] DECODE / TX MEM PT1..PT8
(F-3) to select the PSK decode screen. F-3 F-6
screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the PSK
memory edit screen.
• PSK memory contents of Channel 1 (PT1) is selected.
e Push [PT1..PT8] (F-6) several times to select the
desired PSK memory.
r Push [AUTO TX] (F-5) several times to select the
desired operating option, as follows.
F-5 EXIT/SET
• AUTO TX/RX : A utomatically transm its the
selected memory contents, and EDIT / AUTO TX
returns to receive after the trans-

Auto TX/RX settings
mission.
• AUTO TX : A utomatically transmits the
selected memory contents. To
return to receive, press [F12] on
the keyboard.
• AUTO RX : P ress [F12] on the keyboard
to transmit the selected memory
contents. Automatically returns to
receive after the transmission. OTE: The transceiver always functions in the
N
• No indication : P ress [F12] on the keyboard “AUTO TX/RX” setting when no keyboard is con-
to transmit the selected memory nected.
contents and press [F12] again to
return to receive.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to exit from the PSK
memory edit condition.
57
D Editing PSK memory

The contents of the PSK memories can be set using
the memory edit menu. The memory can store and
re-transmit 8 PSK message for often-used PSK infor-
mation. Total capacity of the memory is 70 characters
per memory channel.
DECODE / TX MEM PT1..PT8
F-3 F-6
q During the PSK mode operation, push [DECODE]
(F-3) to select the PSK decode screen.
screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the PSK
memory edit screen.
• PSK memory contents of Channel 1 (PT1) is selected. 1
e Push [PT1..PT8] (F-6) several times to select the
desired PSK memory channel to be edited. 2
r Push [ABC]/[abc] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) F-5 EXIT/SET
to select the character group, then rotate the main EDIT 3
dial to select the character, or push the keypad for
number input. 123 abc
4
• [abc] (MF6) appears when [ABC] (MF6) is pushed Symbol ABC
when “ABC” character group is selected. and [Symbol]
(MF7) appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when
5
“123” character group is selected.
• Selectable characters (using the main dial); 6
Key selection Characters
7
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 Main dial
8
a to z (small letters) DEL SPACE
9
0 to 9 (numbers) • PSK memory edit screen
10
!#$%&¥?"’`^+–✱
11
/_ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _
@↵ 12
t Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) to move the cursor 13
(F-4) inserts a space.
• Pre-programmed contents
14
CH Contents
acters.
PT1 ↵DE Icom Icom K↵ 15
PT2 ↵DE Icom Icom Icom K↵
u Push [EXIT/SET] to set the contents and exit the
PSK memory edit screen. PT3 ↵QSL UR 599 599 BK↵ 16
PT4 ↵QSL DE Icom Icom UR 599 599 BK↵
✔ For your convenience PT5 ↵73 GL SK↵ 17
When a PC keyboard is connected to the [USB] PT6 ↵CQ CQ CQ DE Icom Icom Icom K↵
connector on the front panel, the PSK memory con- ↵My transceiver is IC–7600 & Antenna is a 3– 18
PT7
tents can also be edited from the keyboard. element triband yagi.↵
↵My PSK equipment is internal modulator & 19
PT8
demodulator of the IC–7600.↵
20
21
58
D PSK decode set mode

This set mode is used to set the PSK AFC range,
time stamp setting, etc. DEF SET WIDE
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
q During the PSK mode operation, push [DECODE]
(F-3) to select the PSK decode screen.
w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the second PSK
decode menu, then push [SET] (F-5) to select the
PSK decode set mode.
normal and wide.
<MENU1> DECODE
set item.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default
condition or value.
items.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from the set mode.
PSK FFT Scope Averaging OFF

Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function Recommendation!
from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF) If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, using
the default or smaller averaging setting is recom-
mended.
PSK FFT Scope Waveform Color 51 153 255

Set the color for the FFT scope waveform. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
scale.
PSK AFC Range ±15Hz

Select the AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal
function operating range from ±15 Hz (default) and properly when a weak PSK signal is received.
±8 Hz.
PSK Time Stamp ON

Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception • ON : Displays the time stamp.
time) display ON or OFF. • OFF : No time stamp display.
PSK Time Stamp (Time) Local

Selects the clock display for time stamp usage. • Local : Selects the time that set in “Time (Now).”
• UTC* : Selects the time that set in “CLOCK2.”
NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF” *The name of choice may differ according to
is selected in “PSK Time Stamp” as shown “CLOCK2 Name” setting (p. 115). “UTC” is the
above. default name of CLOCK2.
59
PSK Time Stamp (Frequency) OFF

Selects the operating frequency display for time • ON : Displays the operating frequency.
stamp usage. • OFF : No operating frequency display.
NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when
“OFF” is selected in “PSK Time Stamp” as
shown below left.
PSK Font Color (Receive) 128 255 128

Set the text color for received characters. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
scale.
2
PSK Font Color (Transmit) 255 106 106
3
Set the text color for transmitted characters. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
• The color is set in RGB format.
B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the
ratio from 0 to 255.
4
scale.
5
PSK Font Color (Time Stamp) 0 155 189 6
• Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
Set the text color for time stamp indication.
7
scale. 8
9
PSK Font Color (TX Buffer) 255 255 255
Set the text color in the TX buffer screen. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and 10
scale.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
60
D Data saving
The contents of the PSK memory/received signal can The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom.
be saved into USB-Memory.
q D uring the PSK decode screen display, push 123 DEL SPACE
[<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the PSK decode sec- Symbol ABC F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4
ond menu.
w Push [SAVE] (F-4) to select decode file save screen.
e Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name:
z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select file name edit con-
dition.
• Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
x Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7)
to select the character group, then rotate the <MENU1> / DIR/FILE SAVE / EDIT

• Decode file save screen— file name edit
_
– ( ) { } _ @ can be selected.
• P ush [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push
[≈] (F-2) to move the cursor right, [DEL] (F-3)
delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to
insert a space.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to store the file name.
• File format
select the save option screen.
x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-
mat between Text to HTML.
• “Text” is the default setting.
default setting.
DEF SAVE/OPT
c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous dis-
play.
• Saving location
z P ush [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view
MAKE REN DEL F-2 F-3 F-4
screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder on the
USB-Memory.
same directory.
• Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder. F-1 F-5
DIR/FILE SAVE/OPT
the folder.
ing a new folder. (Edit the name with the same • Save option screen
manner as the “• File name” above.)
name.
• After saving is completed, returns to the PSK decode
second menu automatically.
✔ For your convenience! When a PC keyboard is connected to the [USB] connec-

Two data formats, Text and HTML, are available for tor on the front panel, the file name can also be edited
PC data storage. from the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is required.
61
■ Repeater operation
A repeater retransmits a received signal on a differ-
ent frequency. When using a repeater, the transmit
frequency is shifted from the receive frequency by an
offset frequency. A repeater can be accessed using
split frequency operation with the transmit frequency
shifted to the repeater's receive frequency.
For accessing a repeater which requires an access

tone, set the tone frequency in the tone frequency
set mode as described below. [SPLIT]
indicator SPLIT Band keys
q First, set the offset frequency for HF and 50 MHz 1
bands in “FM SPLIT Offset (HF)” and “FM SPLIT
Offset (50M),” and set the quick split function to ON 2
in “Quick SPLIT” in the Others set mode. (p. 129)
w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the VFO mode. 3
e Push the desired band key, then set the receive fre-
quency (repeater output frequency).
r Push [AM/FM] several times to select the FM mode. AM/FM Main VFO/MEMO
4
XFC
t Push and hold [SPLIT] for 1 sec. to start repeater
operation.
dial
5
• Repeater tone is turned ON automatically. Appears Appears
• [SPLIT] indicator lights and “ ” appears on 6
the LCD.
• The tone encoder function is turned ON in the FM mode. 7
• Shifted transmit frequency and “TX” appear in the sub
band.
• The transmit frequency can be monitored while push-
8
ing [XFC].
y Push and hold [PTT] to transmit; release [PTT] to
9
receive.
u To return to simplex, push [SPLIT] momentarily. 10
D Repeater access tone frequency setting 11
Some repeaters require subaudible tones to be
accessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on
12
your normal signal and must be set in advance. The
transceiver has 50 tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz. 13
TONE
q During FM mode operation, push and hold [TONE] 14

(MF7) for 1 sec. to select the tone frequency set mode.
w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select REPEATER 15
TONE item.
e Rotate the main dial to select the desired repeater 16
tone frequency.
default setting.
17
F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial
r Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous display. DEF
18
• Available tone frequencies
67.0 85.4 107.2 136.5 165.5 186.2
(unit: Hz)
210.7 254.1
• Tone frequency set mode
19
69.3
71.9
088.5
091.5
110.9
114.8
141.3
146.2
167.9
171.3
189.9
192.8
218.1
225.7
20
74.4 094.8 118.8 151.4 173.8 196.6 229.1
77.0 097.4 123.0 156.7 177.3 199.5 233.6 21
79.7 100.0 127.3 159.8 179.9 203.5 241.8
82.5 103.5 131.8 162.2 183.5 206.5 250.3
62
■ Tone squelch operation

The tone squelch opens only when receiving a sig-
nal containing a matching subaudible tone. You can
silently wait for calls from group members using the XFC
TONE
same tone.
q Set the desired frequency band and select the FM

mode.
w Push [TONE] (MF7) several times to turn the tone
squelch function ON.
• “ ” appears
e Push and hold [TONE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to select
the tone frequency set mode. F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial
r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select T-SQL TONE DEF
item.
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired tone Appears
squelch frequency.
default setting.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous display.
u W hen the received signal includes a matching
tone, squelch opens and the signal can be heard.
• W hen the received signal’s tone does not match,
tone squelch does not open. However, the S-indicator
shows signal strength.
• To open the squelch manually, push [XFC].
i Operate the transceiver in the normal way.
o To cancel the tone squelch, push [TONE] (MF7) to
clear “TSQL.” • Tone frequency set mode
• Available tone frequencies (unit: Hz)

67.0 085.4 107.2 136.5 165.5 186.2 210.7 254.1
69.3 088.5 110.9 141.3 167.9 189.9 218.1
71.9 091.5 114.8 146.2 171.3 192.8 225.7
74.4 094.8 118.8 151.4 173.8 196.6 229.1
77.0 097.4 123.0 156.7 177.3 199.5 233.6
79.7 100.0 127.3 159.8 179.9 203.5 241.8
82.5 103.5 131.8 162.2 183.5 206.5 250.3
63
■ Data mode (AFSK) operation

When operating AMTOR or PACKET with your TNC
and/or PC software, consult the manual that comes
with the TNC and/or the software.
q Connect a PC and TNC to the transceiver. (p. 22) Band keys

w Push a band key to select the desired band.
e Push [SSB] or [AM/FM] to select the desired oper-
ating mode.
r Push and hold [SSB] or [AM/FM] that is pushed in
step e for 1 sec. to turn the data mode ON.
• One of “-D1,” “-D2” or “-D3” is additionally appears.
• During data mode selection, push and hold [SSB] or 1
[AM/FM] for 1 sec. to select data mode 1 (D1), 2 (D2) SSB AM/FM Main dial
and 3 (D3) in sequence.
t Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired signal
2
Appears
and decode it correctly.
• Also use the tuning indicator of the TNC or software.
3
• During the SSB data mode, the 1⁄4 tuning function can
be used for critical tuning. 4
y Operate the PC (software) or TNC to transmit.
• When operating in the SSB data mode, adjust the TNC 5
output level so that the ALC meter reading doesn’t go
outside the ALC zone.
6
NOTE: When data mode is selected, the audio
input from the [ACC1] (pin 4) is used for transmis- 7
sion instead of the [MIC]’s depending on the set
mode settings. Modulation input connector can be 8
changed in the ACC set mode (p. 124)
The fixed condition is used for SSB data transmis- 9
sion as follows:
• [COMP] : OFF 10
• Tx bandwidth : MID*
• Tx Tone (Bass) : 0 11
• Tx Tone (Treble) : 0
*Fixed to the default value (lower: 300, higher: 12
2700). (p. 122) • Tone-pair example
2325 Hz 13
✔ For your information 200 Hz 2125 Hz 14
Carrier frequency is displayed when the SSB data
mode is selected.
See the diagram to the right for the tone-pair example.
15
Carrier frequency
(displayed frequency)
16
17
18
19
20
21
64
■ Spectrum scope screen

This DSP-based spectrum scope allows you to dis-
play the frequency and relative signal strength of
received signals on the strengths of signals. The IC-
7600 has two modes for the spectrum display— one
is center mode, and the other is fixed mode.
In addition, the IC-7600 has a mini scope screen to
save screen space.
D Center mode
Displays signals around the set frequency within the
selected span. The set frequency is always displayed
at the center of the screen.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi- HOLD CENT/FIX

function screens, if necessary. F-4 F-5
w Push [SCOPE] (F-1) to select the scope screen.
e Push [CENT/FIX] (F-5) several times to select the
center mode.
• “ ” is displayed when center mode is selected.
r P ush [SPAN] (F-1) several times to select the
scope span.
• ±2.5, ±5.0, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100 and ±250 kHz are
selectable.
F-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET
• Push and hold [SPAN] (F-1) for 1 sec. to return to ±2.5
kHz span. SCOPE / SPAN ATT MARKER
• Sweep speed is selectable for each span indepen-

dently in the scope set mode. (pgs. 68, 69)
t P ush [ATT] (F-2) several times to activate an
attenuator or turn the attenuator OFF.
• 10, 20 and 30 dB of attenuation is available.
• Push and hold [ATT] (F-2) for 1 sec. to turn OFF the
attenuator.
y Push [MARKER] (F-3) several times to turn the
marker for transmit frequency and/or sub readout
frequency ON or OFF.
• “ ” displays the marker at the transmit frequency.
Appears
• “ ” displays the marker at the sub readout frequency.
• “<<” or “>>” appears when the marker is out of range.
• The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal while • Scope spurious signal example
transmitting. This can be deactivated in the scope set
Spurious signals may be received on the spectrum
mode. (p. 68)
• The spectrum scope shows the peak level hold func-
scope screen regardless of the transceiver’s state
tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the (TX or RX). They are generated in the scope circuit.
current spectrum in a different color. This can be deac- This does not indicate a transceiver malfunction.
tivated and the waveform color can be set in the scope
set mode. (p. 68)
u Push [HOLD] (F-4) to freeze the current spectrum
display.
• Push and hold [HOLD] (F-4) to clear the current spec-
trum waveform.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scope screen.
NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost signal

may also appear. Push [ATT] (F-2) several times Scope spurious example
to activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this
case.
65
D Fixed mode
Displays signals within the specified frequency range.
Conditions on the selected frequency band can be
observed at a glance when using this mode.
HOLD CENT/FIX
F-4 F-5
w Push [SCOPE] (F-1) to select the scope screen.
e Push [CENT/FIX] (F-5) several times to select the
fixed mode.
• “ ” is displayed when fixed mode is selected.
r P ush [ATT] (F-2) several times to activate an
attenuator or turn the attenuator OFF.
• 10, 20 and 30 dB of attenuation is available. 1
• Push and hold [ATT] (F-2) for 1 sec. to turn OFF the F-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET
attenuator. SCOPE / SPAN ATT MARKER 2
t Push [MARKER] (F-3) several times to turn the
marker for transmit frequency and/or sub readout 3
frequency ON or OFF.
• “ ” displays the marker at the transmit frequency.
• “ ” displays the marker at the sub readout frequency.
4
• “ ” displays the marker at the main readout fre-
quency. (always displayed) 5
• “<<” or “>>” appears when the marker is out of range.
• The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal while 6
transmitting. This can be deactivated in the scope set
mode. (p. 68)
• The spectrum scope shows the peak level hold func-
7
Appears
tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the
current spectrum in a different color. This can be deac- 8
tivated and the waveform color can be set in the scope
set mode. (p. 68) 9
y Push [HOLD] (F-4) to freeze the current spectrum
waveform.
10
• Push and hold [HOLD] (F-4) to clear the current spec-
trum waveform.
11
u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scope screen.
12
NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost signal
may appear. Push [ATT] (F-2) several times to 13
activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this
case. 14
The scope bandwidth can be specified for each fre- 15
quency band independently in the scope set mode.
(pgs. 69 to 71) 16
17
18
19
20
21
66
D Mini scope screen display

The mini scope screen can be displayed with another
screen display, such as the set mode menu, decode
screen, memory list screen, etc. simultaneously.
q Set the scope mode (center or fixed), marker, atten-

uator, span, etc. in advance. (pgs. 65, 66)
w Push and hold [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] for 1 sec. to
select the mini scope indication.
• The S/RF meter type during mini scope display can be
selected in the display set mode (Meter Type (Wide
Screen) item). (p. 126) MAIN
/SUB
M.SCOPE
D Scope set mode

This set mode is used to set the waveform color,
sweeping speed, scope range for fixed mode, etc.
q During spectrum scope display ON, push SET
[SET] (F-6) to select the scope set mode screen. F-6

normal and wide.
w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired set
item.
e Set the desired condition using the main dial.
condition or value.
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial
items.
DEF
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from the set mode.
67
Scope during Tx (CENTER Type) ON

Turn display of the transmit signal ON or OFF. OTE: Transmit signal display is available for the
N
center mode only.
Max Hold ON
Turn the peak level hold function ON or OFF.
CENTER Type Display Filter Center

Select the center frequency of the spectrum scope • Filter Center : S hows the selected filter’s center 1
display (center mode only). frequency at the center.
• Carrier Point Center 2
: Shows the selected operating mode
carrier point frequency at the center. 3
• Carrier Point Center (Abs. Freq.)
: In addition to the carrier point center 4
setting above, the actual frequency
is displayed at the bottom of the 5
scope.
6
Waveform Color (Current) 217 241 247
7
Set the waveform color for the currently received • The color is set in RGB format.
signals. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
8
scale.
9
10
Waveform Color (Max Hold) 58 110 147
Set the waveform color for the received signals max- • The color is set in RGB format. 11
imum level. • Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and
B (Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range. 12
scale. 13
Sweep Speed (± 2.5k) MID
14
Select the sweep speed for the ±2.5 kHz span selec- OTE: Signals may be displayed incorrectly with
N 15
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST. “FAST” setting.
16
Sweep Speed (± 5k) MID 17
Select the sweep speed for the ±5 kHz span selec- OTE: Signals may be displayed incorrectly with
N
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST. “FAST” setting. 18
19
Sweep Speed (± 10k) FAST
Select the sweep speed for the ±10 kHz span selec- 20
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
21
68
D Scope set mode (continued)

Select the sweep speed for the ±25 kHz span selec-

Select the sweep speed for the ±50 kHz span selec-

Select the sweep speed for the ±100 kHz span
selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.

Select the sweep speed for the ±250 kHz span
selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.
Fixed Edges ( 0.03 − 1.60) 0.750 − 1.250 MHz

Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode for • S et the frequencies within 0.030 to 1.600 MHz
bands below 1.6 MHz. range in 1 kHz steps.
s edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
A
quency will be automatically set for a display band
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz.
Fixed Edges ( 1.60 − 2.00) 1.800 − 2.000 MHz

Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode • S et the frequencies within 1.600 to 2.000 MHz
scope when the 1.6 to 2 MHz band is selected. range in 1 kHz steps.
Fixed Edges ( 2.00 − 6.00) 3.500 − 4.000 MHz

scope when the 2 to 6 MHz band is selected. range in 1 kHz steps.
A
Fixed Edges ( 6.00 − 8.00) 7.000 − 7.300 MHz

A
69
Fixed Edges ( 8.00 − 11.00) 10.100 − 10.150 MHz

Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode • Set the frequencies within 8.000 to 11.000 MHz
A
Fixed Edges (11.00 − 15.00) 14.000 − 14.350 MHz

scope when the 11 to 15 MHz band is selected. range in 1 kHz steps. 1
A 2
width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. 3
Fixed Edges (15.00 − 20.00) 18.068 − 18.168 MHz 4
Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode
scope when the 15 to 20 MHz band is selected.
• Set the frequencies within 15.000 to 20.000 MHz
range in 1 kHz steps.
5
A 6
Fixed Edges (20.00 − 22.00) 21.000 − 21.450 MHz 8
9
A 10
Fixed Edges (22.00 − 26.00) 24.890 − 24.990 MHz 12
13
A 14
16
17
18
19
20
21
70
D Scope set mode (continued)
Fixed Edges (26.00 − 30.00) 28.000 − 28.500 MHz

A
Fixed Edges (30.00 − 45.00) 30.000 − 30.500 MHz

A
Fixed Edges (45.00 − 60.00) 50.000 − 50.500 MHz

A
71
■ Preamplifier
The preamp amplifies received signals in the receiver
front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity.
Set this to preamp 1 or preamp 2 when receiving
weak signals.
➥ Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre- P.AMP
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.

➥ Push and hold [P.AMP] (MF3) for 1 sec. to turn the
preamp function OFF.
For all HF and 50 MHz bands

1
High-gain preamp for 24 MHz band
and above (Available for all HF and 2
50 MHz bands)
3
✔ About the “P.AMP2” 4
The “P.AMP 2” is a high gain receive amplifier. When
the “P.AMP 2” is used in the presence of strong elec- 5
tromagnetic fields, distortion sometimes results. In
such cases, use the transceiver with the “P.AMP 1” or
“P.AMP OFF” setting.
6
The “P.AMP 2” is most effective when:
7
• Used on bands above 24 MHz and when signals are
weak. 8
• Receive sensitivity is insufficient when using low-
gain antennas, or while using a narrow band 9
antenna (such as small loop, a Beverage antenna
or a short Yagi antenna). 10
11
■ Attenuator 12
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being
distorted when very strong signals are near the 13
desired frequency or when very strong electromag-
netic fields, such as from broadcast stations near 14
your location.
ATT
15
➥ Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenua-
tor 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB or attenuator OFF. 16
➥ Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the
attenuator function OFF. 17
6 dB attenuation 18
12 dB attenuation 19
18 dB attenuation 20
21
72
■ RIT function
The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function com-
pensates for off-frequency operation of the received
station.
The function shifts the receive frequency up to ±9.999

kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancelling the 1
Hz step readout) without moving the transmit fre-
quency.
RIT CLEAR
q Push [RIT] to turn the RIT function ON and OFF.

• “ ” and the shifting frequency appear when the
function is ON.
w Rotate the [RIT/∂TX] control.
• Push and hold [CLEAR] for 1 sec. to reset the RIT fre-
quency.
• Push [CLEAR] momentarily to reset the RIT frequency
when the quick RIT/∂TX clear function is ON. (p. 132)
• Push and hold [RIT] for 1 sec. to add the shift fre- [RIT/∂TX]
quency to the operating frequency.
RIT shifting frequency
D RIT monitor function

XFC
When the RIT function is ON, pushing and holding
[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency
directly (RIT is temporarily cancelled).
✔ For your convenience— Calculate function

The frequency shift of the RIT function can be added/
subtracted to the displayed frequency.
➥ While displaying the RIT shift frequency, push and

hold [RIT] for 1 sec.
73
■ AGC function
The AGC (auto gain control) controls receiver gain to
produce a constant audio output level even when the
received signal strength varies greatly.
The transceiver has 3 preset AGC characteristics
(time constant: fast, mid, slow) for non-FM modes.
he FM mode AGC time constant is fixed as

T
‘FAST’ (0.1 sec.) and AGC time constant cannot
be changed.
[AGC]
D Selecting the preset value
q Select any non-FM mode.
1
w Push [AGC] (MF5) several times to select AGC
fast, AGC medium (MID) or AGC slow. 2
3
F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial
4
DEF
5
D Setting the AGC time constant preset value 6
q Select any non-FM mode. • AGC set mode screen
w Push and hold [AGC] (MF5) for 1 sec. to select the
AGC set mode.
7
e Push [AGC] (MF5) several times to select FAST
time constant.
8
r Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
stant for ‘AGC FAST.’ 9
• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
(depends on mode) or turned OFF. 10
value. 11
t Push [AGC] (MF5) to select medium time con-
stant.
y Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
• Selectable AGC time constant (unit: sec.) 12
Mode Default Selectable AGC time constant
stant for ‘AGC MID.’
• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec. 0.3 (FAST) 13
OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,
(depends on mode) or turned OFF. SSB 2.0 (MID)
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default 6.0 (SLOW)
1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 14
value. 0.1 (FAST)
u Push [AGC] (MF5) to select slow time constant.
CW 0.5 (MID)
OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 15
i Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con- 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
stant for ‘AGC SLOW.’
1.2 (SLOW)
0.1 (FAST)
16
• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
RTTY OFF, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2,
(depends on mode) or turned OFF.
PSK
0.5 (MID)
1.2 (SLOW)
1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 17
value.
o Select another non-FM mode, then repeat steps e
3.0 (FAST)
OFF, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 18
AM 5.0 (MID)
to i if desired. 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0
!0 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the AGC set mode screen.
7.0 (SLOW) 19
FM 0.1 (FAST) Fixed
20
21
74
■ Twin PBT operation

<MODE> SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK/AM
PBT (Passband Tuning) electronically narrows the IF
passband width by shifting the IF frequency slightly
outside of the IF filter passband to reject interference.
The IC-7600 uses DSP for the PBT function. Moving
both [TWIN-PBT] controls to the same position shifts
the IF both above and below the received frequency.
PBT-CLR [TWIN-PBT]
➥ The LCD shows the passband width and shift fre-
quency graphically.
• The indicator on the [PBT-CLR] switch lights when
PBT is in use.
➥ Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to select the fil-
ter set screen. Current passband width and shift
frequency is displayed in the filter set screen.
➥ To set the [TWIN-PBT] controls to the center posi- F-4 FILTER
tions, push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. DEF
The variable range depends on the passband width Shows filter width, shifting value and condition
and mode. The edge of the variable range is half
of the passband width, and PBT is adjustable in 25
(the SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK modes) or 100 Hz (the AM
mode) steps.
• The [TWIN-PBT] controls should normally be set to

the center positions (PBT setting is cleared) when
there is no interference. • Filter set screen
• When PBT is used, the audio tone may be changed. “SHARP” is selected.
• Not available for the FM mode.
• While rotating the [TWIN-PBT] controls, noise may
occur. This comes from the DSP unit and does not
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a
default value.
• PBT operation example

Both controls at Cutting the lower Cutting both lower and
center position passband edge higher passband edges
PBT2 PBT2 PBT2

PBT1 PBT1 PBT1
Passband Passband
IF center frequency Interference Desired signal Interference Desired signal Interference
75
■ IF filter selection
The transceiver has 3 passband width IF filters for
each mode.
For the SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width
can be set between 50 and 3600 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz
steps. A total of 41 passband widths are available.
For the RTTY mode, the passband width can be set
between 50 and 2700 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A
total of 32 passband widths are available.
For the AM mode, the passband width can be set
between 200 Hz and 10 kHz in 200 Hz steps. A total
of 50 passband widths are available.
1
For the FM mode, the passband width is fixed and 3 2
passband widths are available.
3
The filter selection is automatically memorized in
each mode.
The PBT shift frequencies are automatically mem-
4
orized in each filter. DEF
F-4
5
D IF filter selection 6
q Select the desired mode.
w Push [FILTER] several times to select the IF filter
1, 2 or 3.
7
• The selected passband width and filter number is dis-
played in the LCD.
8
D Filter passband width setting (except the F-1 FILTER EXIT/SET Main dial 9
FM mode)
10
BW
q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to select the fil- Selected Passband
ter set screen.
w Select any mode except FM.
IF filter width 11
• Passband widths for the FM modes are fixed and can-
not be set. 12
e Push [FILTER] several times to select the desired
IF filter. 13
r Push [BW] (F-1), then rotate the main dial to adjust the
desired passband width. Then push [BW] (F-1) to set. 14
• While pushing and holding [BW] (F-1), rotating the
main dial also adjusts the passband width. After adjust- 15
ment, release [BW] (F-1) to set.
• In the SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width
can be set within the following range.
16
50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps • During the passband width setting
600 to 3600 Hz 100 Hz steps Blinks
17
• In the RTTY mode, the passband width can be set
within the following range. 18
50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps
600 to 2700 Hz 100 Hz steps
• In the AM mode, the passband width can be set within
19
the following range.
200 Hz to 10 kHz 200 Hz steps 20
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default he PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the
T
value. (Roofing filter setting also selects a default value.) passband width is changed. 21
t Repeat steps w to r if desired for other modes. T his filter set screen graphically displays the
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter set screen. PBT shift frequencies and CW pitch operations.
76
D Roofing filter selection

The IC-7600 has 3, 6 and 15 kHz roofing filters at the DEF ROOFING
1st IF frequency. The roofing filter provides interfer- F-4 F-5
ence reduction from nearby strong signals.
q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to select the fil-

ter set screen.
w Select any mode except FM.
e Push [ROOFING] (F-5] to select the desired filter
width from 15 kHz, 6 kHz and 3 kHz.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default FILTER EXIT/SET
value. (Filter passband width setting also selects a
default value.) • Filter set screen
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter set screen.
“SHARP” is selected.
• Default roofing filter (unit: kHz)

Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3 Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3
SSB 15 15 6 RTTY 15 6 6
SSB-D 6 6 6 PSK 6 6 6
CW 6 6 6 AM 15 15 15
D DSP filter shape

The type of DSP filter shape for each SSB, SSB data
and CW can be selected independently from soft and
sharp. DEF SHAPE
F-4 F-6
q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to select the fil-
ter set screen.
w Select the SSB, SSB data or CW mode.
e Push [SHAPE] (F-6) several times to select the
desired filter shape from soft and sharp.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter set screen.
The filter shape can be set for each band (HF and
50 MHz bands), mode, as well as the passband width F-1 F-2 FILTER EXIT/SET Main dial
setting (CW only) independently from your default
setting in the filter shape set mode.
77
D Filter shape set mode

The type of DSP filter shape for SSB, SSB data and
CW can be selected independently from soft and
sharp.
q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to select the fil- • Filter shape set mode
ter set screen.
w Push and hold [SHAPE] (F-6) for 1 sec. to select
the filter shape set mode.
w Select the desired item using [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2).
e Rotate the main dial to select the filter shape from
soft and sharp.
value. 1
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter shape set mode.
2
HF SSB (600Hz – ) SHARP
3
Select the filter shape for the SSB mode in HF he set filter shape is automatically used only
T
bands. when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. 4
SSB-D (600Hz – ) SHARP
5
Select the filter shape for the SSB data mode in HF The set filter shape is automatically used only 6
bands. when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
7
CW ( – 500Hz) SHARP 8
Select the filter shape for the CW mode in HF The set filter shape is automatically used only
bands. when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower. 9
10
CW (600Hz – ) SHARP
Select the filter shape for the CW mode in HF he set filter shape is automatically used only
T 11
bands. when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
12
50M SSB (600Hz – ) SOFT 13
Select the filter shape for the SSB mode in 50 MHz The set filter shape is automatically used only
band. when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. 14
15
SSB-D (600Hz – ) SHARP
Select the filter shape for the SSB data mode in he set filter shape is automatically used only
T
16
50 MHz band. when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
17
CW ( – 500Hz) SHARP 18
Select the filter shape for the CW mode in 50 MHz
band.
The set filter shape is automatically used only
when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.
19
20
CW (600Hz – ) SHARP
Select the filter shape for the CW mode in 50 MHz he set filter shape is automatically used only
T
21
band. when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.
78
■ Dualwatch operation
Dualwatch monitors 2 frequencies with the same
mode simultaneously.
During dualwatch, both frequencies should be on the
same band, because the bandpass filter in the RF cir-
cuit is selected for the main readout frequency.
q Set a desired frequency into the main band. DUAL

WATCH SPLIT CHANGE
w Push and hold [DUALWATCH] for 1 sec.
•“ ” appears.
• The sub readout operating mode is equalized to the
main readout.
• Equalized receive frequency appears on the sub band
frequency readout. This quick dualwatch function can
be turned OFF in the Others set mode. (p. 128)
•P ushing [DUALWATCH] momentarily activates the
dualwatch with the previously operated frequency. [BAL] control MAIN Main dial
e Rotate the main dial to set another desired fre- /SUB
M.SCOPE
quency.
r Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] to enables the sub
band access when changing the frequency, etc. in Appears
sub band.
• Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] again for the main band
access.
t Adjust the [BAL] control to set a suitable signal
strength balance between the main and sub read-
out frequencies.
• S-meter shows the combined signal strength.
y To transmit on the sub readout frequency, push
[CHANGE] or [SPLIT].
NOTE:
• A beat note may be heard depending on the fre-
quency combination.
•T he RIT function can be used for the main read-
out only.
• The ∂TX function can be used for the transmit
readout (main readout when the split function
OFF; sub readout when the split function ON).
79
• Scanning during dualwatch

Scanning operates only for the main readout. To
operate the scan during dualwatch, scan on the main
readout and use the sub readout for your QSO using
both dualwatch and split frequency operation.
q Program the desired programmed scan edges in DUAL

WATCH SPLIT
the same amateur band. See p. 101 for program-
ming.
• If you plan to operate a ∂F scan, programming the
scan edges may not be necessary.
w Push [SPLIT] to turn the split frequency function 1
ON.
•“ ” appears. 2
e Select VFO mode for the main readout.
r Set the desired operating frequency for the main
readout.
F-1
PROG
F-2
∂F
F-5
SCAN
EXIT/SET
3
t Push and hold [DUALWATCH] for 1 sec.
•“ ” appears.
4
•E
qualized receive frequency and operating mode
appear on the sub band readout and the dualwatch 5
function is turned ON.
y Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen. 6
• Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi-func-
tion screens, if necessary.
u Push [PROG] (F-1) or [∂F] (F-2) to start the pro-
7
grammed scan or ∂F scan, respectively.
• Scan activates on the main readout between the pro-
8
grammed scan edges or within the ∂F span.
• Transmitting on the sub readout stops the scan. 9
i To cancel the scan, push [EXIT/SET].
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
80
■ Noise blanker
<MODE> SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK/AM
The noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such
as the noise from car ignitions. The noise blanker is
not available for the FM mode.
➥ Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker function ON or

OFF.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the noise
blanker is ON.
When using the noise blanker, received signals

may be distorted if they are excessively strong or
for other types of noise than impulse. Turn the
noise blanker OFF, or set the noise blanker thresh- NB F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial
DEF
old level (see below) to a shallow position in this
case.
• NB set mode
D NB set mode
To deal with various type of noise, attenuation level
and noise blanking duration can be set in the NB set
mode.
q Push and hold [NB] for 1 sec. to select the NB set

mode.
w Select the desired item using [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2).
e Rotate the main dial to the desired set value or
condition.
value.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the NB set mode.
NB Level 50%
Set the noise blanker threshold level from 0% to
100%.
NB Depth 8
Set the noise attenuation level from 1 to 10.
NB Width 50
Set the blanking duration from 1 to 100.
81
■ Noise reduction
The noise reduction function reduces random noise
components and enhances desired signals which are
buried in noise. The DSP performs the random noise
reduction function.
q Push [NR] to turn the noise reduction ON.

• The indicator on this switch lights green.
w Rotate the [NR] control to adjust the noise reduc-
tion level. [NR] NR
control
e Push [NR] to turn the noise reduction OFF.
• The indicator goes off.
Noise reduction OFF Noise reduction activated
1
Large rotations of the [NR] control results in audio Noise components Desired
signal masking or distortion. Set the [NR] control signal (CW) 2
for maximum readability.
3
4
■ Dial lock function 5
The dial lock function prevents frequency changes 6
by accidental movement of the tuning dial. The lock
function electronically locks the dial. 7
[LOCK] indicator
➥ Push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to turn
the dial lock function ON or OFF.
8
• The [LOCK] indicator lights when the dial lock
function is in use. 9
• While split frequency operation is ON, the split lock
function may be turned ON. (p. 89) 10
NOTE: When “LOCK/SPEECH” is selected in 11
SPEECH
[[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch] item in the Others set
mode, pushing [SPEECH/LOCK] activates the dial
LOCK
12
lock function. (p. 131)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
82
■ Notch function
This transceiver has auto and manual notch functions.
The auto notch function uses DSP to automatically
attenuate beat tones, tuning signals, etc., even if they
are moving. The manual notch can be set to attenu-
ate a frequency via the [NOTCH] control.
The auto notch can be used in the SSB, AM and FM
mode.
NOTCH [NOTCH] control
The manual notch can be used in the SSB, CW,
RTTY, PSK and AM modes. • Auto notch indication
Appears
➥ P ush [NOTCH] to toggle the notch function
between auto, manual and OFF in the SSB and
AM modes.
• Either auto or manual notch function can be deacti-
vated in the Others set mode. (p. 132)
➥ Push [NOTCH] to turn the manual notch function
ON or OFF in the CW, RTTY, PSK modes. • Manual notch indication
➥ Push [NOTCH] to turn the auto notch function ON Appears
or OFF in the FM mode.
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the auto
or manual notch function is ON.
• When the manual notch function is ON, push and hold
[NOTCH] for 1 sec. to select the notch filter width for
manual notch from wide, middle and narrow.
• Set to attenuate a frequency for manual notch via the
Auto notch OFF Auto notch ON
[NOTCH] control.
• “ ” appears when auto notch is in use.
• “ ” appears when manual notch is in use.
Desired Desired
signal (AF) signal (AF)
While tuning the manual notch, noise may be
Unwanted tone frequency Particular frequency is attenuated
■ Auto tune function

<MODE> CW/AM
The automatic tuning function tunes the displayed fre-
quency automatically when an off-frequency signal is
received within the range ±500 Hz (CW) or ±5 kHz (AM).
This function is active while in CW or AM is selected.
➥ Push [AUTO TUNE] to toggle the auto tune func-

tion ON or OFF.
• “ ” blinks when auto tune function is acti- AUTO
vated. TUNE
• After 2 sec. has passed, the auto tune function stops
tuning automatically even it’s still off-frequency. Appears
• If [AUTO TUNE] is pushed when the RIT function is
ON, the auto tune function changes the RIT frequency,
not the displayed frequency.
IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a sig-
nal with interference, the automatic tuning function
may tune the receiver to an undesired signal.
NOTE: The automatic tuning function does not
active on the sub band.
83
■ VOX function
<MODE> SSB/AM/FM
The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function
switches between transmit and receive with your
voice. This function provides “hands-free” operation.
D Using the VOX function DEF

VOX F-1 F-2 F-4
q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM).
w Push [VOX] (MF6) to turn the VOX function ON or
OFF.
• “VOX” appears while the VOX is in use.
1
D Adjusting the VOX function
q Push [SSB] or [AM/FM] to select a phone mode
2
SSB AM/FM EXIT/SET Main dial
(SSB, AM, FM).
w Push and hold [VOX] (MF6) for 1 sec. to select the
3
• VOX set mode screen
VOX set mode.
e Select the VOX gain item using [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2). 4
r While speaking into the microphone, rotate the
main dial to the point where the transceiver is con- 5
tinuously transmitting.
t If the receive audio from the speaker causes the 6
VOX circuit to switch to, adjust the anti-VOX set- Push and hold for 1 sec. to select a default value.
ting to the point where speaker audio does not acti- 7
vate the VOX.
• Select the Anti-VOX item using [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2). 8
• Rotate the main dial.
y Adjust the VOX delay for a convenient interval
before returning to receive.
9
u Set the VOX voice delay if desired.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the VOX set mode.
10
11
VOX Gain 50%
This item adjusts the VOX gain for the VOX func- This setting can be adjusted from 0% to 100% in 1%
12
tion. Higher values make the VOX function more
sensitive to your voice.
steps.
13
14
Anti–VOX 50%
This item adjusts the ANTI-VOX gain for the VOX This setting can be adjusted from 0% to 100% in 1% 15
function. Higher values make the VOX function less steps.
sensitive to receiver output audio from a speaker or 16
headphones.
17
VOX Delay 0.2s
Set the VOX delay for a convenient interval before
18
returning to receive within 0.0 to 2.0 sec. range.
19
VOX Voice Delay OFF 20
Set the VOX voice delay to prevent clipping of the hen using the VOX voice delay, turn the TX
W
first few syllables of a transmission when switching monitor function OFF to prevent transmitted audio 21
to transmit. from be echoed.
OFF, Short, Mid and Long settings are available.
84
■ Break-in function
<MODE> CW
The break-in function is used in the CW mode to
automatically toggle the transceiver between transmit
and receive when keying. The IC-7600 is capable of
full break-in or semi break-in.
D Semi break-in operation

BK-IN CW
During semi break-in operation, the transceiver imme-
diately transmits when keying, then returns to receive
after a pre-set delay time has passed from when you
stop keying.
q Push [CW] to select the CW or CW-R mode.

w Push [BK-IN] (MF6) once or twice to turn the semi
break-in function ON.
• “BKIN” appears. [BK-IN DELAY] [KEY SPEED]
e Rotate [BK-IN DELAY] to set the break-in delay
time (the delay from transmit to receive).
When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to

adjust the keying speed.
Appears
D Full break-in operation BK-IN CW

During full break-in operation, the transceiver imme-
diately transmits when keying, then returns to receive
after you stop keying.
q Push [CW] to select the CW or CW-R mode.

w Push [BK-IN] (MF6) once or twice to turn the full
break-in function ON.
• “F-BKIN” appears.
[KEY SPEED]
When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to
adjust the keying speed.
Appears
85
■ Speech compressor
<MODE> SSB
The speech compressor increases average RF output
power, improving signal strength and readability. COMP
q Push [SSB] to select the USB or LSB mode.

w Push and hold [COMP] (MF7) for 1 sec. to select
the COMP TBW set screen.
e Adjust the [MIC GAIN] control so that the ALC
meter reads within the ALC zone, whether or not
you speak softly or loudly.
r Push [COMP] (MF7) to turn the speech compres- [MIC GAIN] SSB EXIT/SET Main dial
sor ON. 1
t While speaking into the microphone, rotate the
main dial, so that the COMP meter reads within the • COMP/TBW set screen 2
COMP zone (10 to 20 dB range) for your normal
voice level. 3
When the COMP meter peaks exceed 20 dB,
your transmitted voice may be distorted. 4
y Push [COMP] (MF7) or [EXIT/SET] to exit COMP Speech compressor is OFF
TBW set screen. 5
u Adjust the drive gain to set the ALC meter read-
ing within the 30 to 50% range of the ALC scale. 6
(p. 37)
7
Speech compressor is ON
8
9
■ Transmit filter width setting
<MODE> SSB
COMP 10
The transmit filter width for the SSB mode can be
selected between wide, middle and narrow.
11
q Push [SSB] to select the USB or LSB mode.
12
w Push and hold [COMP] (MF7) for 1 sec. to select
the COMP TBW set screen. 13
e Push [COMP] (MF7) to turn the speech compres-
sor ON or OFF.
SSB F-3 EXIT/SET
14
TBW
r P ush [TBW] (F-3) several times to select the
desired transmit filter width between wide, middle 15
and narrow.
• The filter can be independently set on the speech com- 16
pressor function is ON or OFF.
• The following filters are specified as the default. Each
of the filter width can be re-set in the level set mode. “WIDE” setting
17
(p. 122)
WIDE : 100 Hz to 2.9 kHz 18
MID : 300 Hz to 2.7 kHz
NAR : 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz 19
t Push [COMP] (MF7) or [EXIT/SET] to exit COMP
TBW set screen. 20
21
86
■ ∂TX function
The ∂TX function shifts the transmit frequency up to
±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancel-
ling the 1 Hz step readout) without moving the receive
frequency.
q Push [∂TX] to turn ∂TX function ON. ∂TX CLEAR

• “ ” and the shifting frequency appear when the
function is ON.
w Rotate the [RIT/∂TX] control.
e T o reset the ∂TX frequency, push and hold
[CLEAR] for 1 sec.
• P ush [CLEAR] momentarily to reset the ∂TX fre-
quency when the quick RIT/∂TX clear function is ON.
(p. 132)
[RIT/∂TX]
r To cancel the ∂TX function, push [∂TX] again.
• “ ” and the shifting frequency disappears.
When RIT and ∂TX are ON at the same time, the

[RIT/∂TX] control shifts both the transmit and
receive frequencies from the displayed frequency
at the same time.
Appears
D ∂TX monitor function

When the ∂TX function is ON, pushing and holding
XFC
[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency
directly.
✔ For your convenience— Calculate function

The frequency shift of the ∂TX function can be added/
subtracted to the displayed frequency.
➥ While displaying the ∂TX shift frequency, push

and hold [∂TX] for 1 sec.
■ Monitor function
The monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-
mit IF signals in any mode. Use this to check voice
characteristics while adjusting SSB transmit parame-
ter (p. 121).
The CW sidetone functions regardless of the
[MONITOR] switch setting.
q P ush [MONITOR] to turn the monitor function

ON and OFF. MONITOR F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial
• The indicator on this switch lights green when the mon- DEF
itor function is ON.
w Push and hold [MONITOR] to the monitor set mode. • Monitor set mode
e Rotate the main dial to adjust the monitor level.
value.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the monitor set mode.
NOTE: When using the VOX voice delay, turn the

monitor function OFF; or transmitted audio will be
echoed.
87
■ Split frequency operation

Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and
receive in the same mode on two different frequen- MAIN
/SUB
cies. Split frequency operation is performed using 2 [SPLIT] indicator SPLIT M.SCOPE
frequencies on the main and sub readouts.
The following is an example of setting 21.290 MHz for
receiving and 21.310 MHz for transmitting.
q Set 21.290 MHz (USB) in VFO mode.

w Push [SPLIT], then push and hold [CHANGE] for 1
sec.
• The quick split function is much more convenient for
selecting the transmit frequency. See the next section
CHANGE
XFC
Main dial
1
for details.
• The equalized transmit frequency and “ ” • When the split function ON 2
appear on the LCD.
• [SPLIT] indicator lights.
• “ ” appears to show the transmit frequency read-
3
out.
e While pushing and holding [XFC], rotate the main
4
dial to set the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz.
• The transmit frequency can be monitored while push- 5
ing [XFC]. • When [XFC] is pushed
r Now you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit 6
on 21.310 MHz.
7
To change the transmit and receive frequencies, push
[CHANGE] to exchange the main and sub readouts. 8
✔ CONVENIENT
• The split frequency operation is ready 9
• Direct shift frequency input
The shift frequency can be entered directly.
10
q Push [F-INP ENT].
w Enter the desired shift frequency with the digit keys.
11
• 1 kHz to 9.999 MHz can be set.
• W hen you require a negative shift direction, push 12
[GENE •] in advance.
e Push [SPLIT] to input the shift frequency in the sub 13
readout and the split function is turned ON.
14
• Dualwatch function
The dualwatch function is convenient for tuning the
transmit frequency while monitoring both frequencies
15
used for transmitting and receiving.
16
• Split lock function (p. 129)
Accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating the main
17
dial changes the receive frequency. To prevent this,
use both the split lock and dial lock functions to 18
change the transmit frequency only. The split lock
function cancels the dial lock function while pushing 19
[XFC] during split frequency operation.
The split lock function is OFF by default, but can be
20
turned ON in the Others set mode.
21
88
■ Quick split function

When you find a DX station, an important consider-
ation is how to set the split frequency.
When you push and hold the [SPLIT] switch for 1
sec., the split frequency operation is turned ON, and
the sub readout frequency and operating mode is
equalized to the main readout, then enters standby
for transmit frequency input.
This shortens the time needed to begin split fre-
quency operation.
The quick split function is ON by default. For your
convenience, it can be turned OFF in the Others set
mode. (p. 129) In this case, the [SPLIT] switch does
not equalize the main and sub readout frequencies.
q Suppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB)

in VFO mode. [SPLIT] indicator SPLIT Keypad
w Push and hold [SPLIT] for 1 sec.
• Split frequency operation is turned ON.
• [SPLIT] indicator lights.
• T he sub readout frequency and operating mode is
equalized to the main readout.
• The sub readout enters standby for transmit frequency
input and “ ” appears.
• During FM mode operation, the sub readout frequency
shifts from the main readout frequency according to the Main dial
Others set mode setting. (p. 129)
• The tone encoder function is turned ON in the FM
mode.
e Rotate the main dial to set the transmit frequency;
or, input the transmit frequency using the keypad
and [F-INP ENT]; or, input a shift frequency using
the keypad and [SPLIT].
• “ ” disappears when [F-INP ENT] is pushed.
• Offset frequency setting with the keypad and [SPLIT].
[Example]
To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency:
- Push [1.8 1] then [SPLIT].
To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:
- Push [GENE •], [7 3] then [SPLIT].
D Split lock function

The split lock function is convenient for changing only
the transmit frequency. When the split lock function [LOCK] indicator Main dial
is not used, accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotat-
ing the main dial, changes the receive frequency. The
split lock function is OFF by default, but can be turned
ON in the Others set mode. (p. 129)
q While split frequency operation is ON, push and

hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to activate the
split lock function. SPEECH
• [LOCK] indicator lights. XFC LOCK
w While pushing and holding [XFC], rotate the main
dial to change the transmit frequency.
• If you accidentally release [XFC] while rotating the
main dial, the receive frequency does NOT change.
89
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 5
■ About digital voice recorder
The IC-7600 has digital voice memories, up to 4
messages for transmit, and up to 20 messages for
receive.
A maximum message length of 30 sec. can be
recorded into receive memory (total message length
for all channels of up to 209 sec.) and a total mes-
sage length of up to 99 sec. can be recorded in trans-
mit memory.
The transmit memory is very convenient for repeated
CQ and exchange transmissions in contests, as well
VOICE / MIC REC
as when making repeated calls to DX’peditions.
F-2
1
q Select any mode.
w P ush [VOICE] (F-2) to display voice recorder 2
screen.
e Push [EXIT/SET] to display voice recorder menu. 3
r Push [PLAY] (F-1) or [MIC REC] (F-2) to select
the desired memory channel screen, then record
audio or playback the contents.
4
5
F-1 EXIT/SET REC PLAY
t P ush [EXIT/SET] twice to exit voice recorder
screen. PLAY
6
About recording received audio and playing back the contents
• Example— When [REC] is pushed and held for 1sec. 7
Push and hold REC for 1 sec.
(starts recording)
Push REC momentarily
(stops recording)
Push and hold REC for 1 sec.
(starts recording)
Push REC momentarily
(stops recording) 8
9
20 sec. 30 sec. 10
Push REC momentarily within 30 sec. after These contents Push REC momentarily after passing
pushing and holding REC for 1 sec., records won’t be recorded. 30 sec. from pushing and holding REC 11
the all contents. for 1 sec., records the 30 sec. before
• Example— When [REC] is pushed momentarily

canceling the record.
12
Push REC momentarily Push REC momentarily 13
NOTE: The contents will be recorded into an independent memory
channels automatically. 14
15 sec. 3 sec. When REC is pushed momentarily again within 15 sec.* 15
(default) from the last REC operation, all the contents between
Push REC momentarily REC operations will be recorded. 16
records the contents of
*The recording time period can be changed with “Normal Rec Time” in voice set mode (p. 97).
the previous 15 sec.*
17
• Playing back the all contents in a channel • Playing back the end of 5 sec.* in a channel
Push [PLAY] (F-3) momentarily. 18

Or, push and hold PLAY for 1 sec. Push PLAY momentarily.
19
20
30 sec. (max.) Not playing back Play back (5 sec.; default)
21
*The playing back time period can be changed with
“Short Play Time” in voice set mode (p. 97).
90
5 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
■ Recording a received audio

Up to 20 receive voice memories can be recorded
in the IC-7600. A total of 209 sec. of audio can be
recorded in receive messages. However, the max-
imum recordable length of a single message is
30 sec.
This voice recorder records not only the received

audio, but also the information such as operating fre-
quency, mode, and the recording time for your future
reference.
D Basic recording
w Select the desired mode.
e Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder
screen.
• Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-
played. If the TX memory channel (T1–T4) appears, F-2 F-6 EXIT/SET REC
push [T/R] (F-6) to select an RX memory channel. VOICE T/R
r Push and hold [REC] for 1 sec. to start recording.
• The operating frequency, mode and current time are
automatically programmed as the memory names.
t Push [REC] momentarily to stop recording.
IMPORTANT!
Push [REC] to stop recording before, or when
30 sec. has elapsed from the start of recording.
The remaining time for recording
The voice recorder memory records 30 sec. (max.)
is displayed.
of audio before [REC] is pushed.
For example, when recording 40 sec. of audio, the
first 10 sec. audio will be overwritten with the last
10 sec., so that the total of audio recorded is only
30 sec.
When you record the 21st audio message, or
when the total audio length exceeds 209 sec., the
oldest recorded audio is automatically erased to
make room for the new audio.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder

screen.
NOTE: When transmit (or [PTT] is pushed) while

recording, no audio will be recorded.
D One-touch recording
To record the received signal immediately, one-touch
voice recording is available.
➥ P ush [REC] momentarily to store the previous

15 sec. audio.
• The recordable time period can be set in the voice set
mode. (p. 97)
REC
91
■ Playing the recorded audio

D Basic playing
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi- PLAY T/R
w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder
screen.
played. If the TX memory message (T1–T4) appears,
push [T/R] (F-6) to select RX memory message.
voice memory to playback.
r Push [PLAY] (F-3) to start playback.
• “ ” indicators appear and the timer counts F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET 1
down. VOICE /
t P ush [PLAY] (F-3) again to stop playback if
Appears
2
desired.
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the
recorded contents in the message are played.
3
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen.
4
5
6
7
Appears Counts down 8
9
D One-touch playing
The previously recorded audio in message 1 can be 10
played back without selecting voice recorder screen.
11
➥ P ush [PLAY] momentarily to playback the last
5 sec. of the previously recorded audio. 12
• To playback all contents of the previously recorded
• “
audio, push and hold [PLAY] for 1 sec.
” indicator appears.
13
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the PLAY
recorded contents in the message are played, or after 14
5 sec.
• The playback time period can be set in the voice set 15
mode. (p. 97)
16
17
18
19
20
21
92
■ Protect the recorded contents

The protect function is available to protect the
recorded contents from accidental erasure, such as
over-writing, etc.
q Call up the voice recorder screen, RX memory.

w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
voice message.
e Push [PROTECT] (F-4) to turn the protect function
ON or OFF.
• “ ” indicator appears when the contents is protected.
r Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen. F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET
PROTECT
■ Erasing the recorded contents

The recorded contents can be erased independently
by message.
q Call up the voice recorder screen, RX memory. PLAY CLR

w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired F-3 F-6
voice message to be erased.
e Push [PLAY] (F-3) to start playback.
• “ ” indicators appear and the timer counts
down.
r Push and hold [CLR] (F-6) for 1 sec. to erase the
contents.
• Push [PROTECT] (F-4) to release the protection in
advance if necessary.
F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET
t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
PROTECT
screen.
93
■ Recording a message for transmit

To transmit a message using the voice recorder,
record the desired message in advance as described
below.
The IC-7600 has digital voice memories for transmis-
sion, up to 4 messages and a total message length of
up to 99 sec. can be recorded.
D Recording
function screens, if necessary. REC
screen.
F-4
1
e Push [EXIT/SET] to select voice recorder menu.
r Push [MIC REC] (F-2) to select the voice mic. 2
record screen.
t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired 3
message.
y While speaking into the microphone with your nor- 4
mal voice level, adjust the [MIC GAIN] control so F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET
that the [MIC-REC LEVEL] indicator reads within VOICE 5
100%.
6
MIC REC
u P ush and hold [REC] (F-4) for 1 sec. to start
recording.

• Speak into the microphone without pushing [PTT].
7
• Previously recorded contents are cleared.
• Audio output from the internal speaker is automatically 8
muted.
i Push [REC] (F-4) momentarily to stop recording. 9
• The recording is terminated automatically when the
remaining time becomes 0 sec. Appears Adjust [MIC GAIN] control so that this
indicator reads within 100%.
10
o Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen. 11
D Confirming a message for transmit
12
q P erform the steps q to r as “D Recording” CLR 13
above. F-6
w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
message.
14
e Push [PLAY] (F-3) to playback the recorded con-
tents.
15
• Push and hold [CLR] (F-6) for 1 sec. to erase the con- 16
tents.
r Push [PLAY] (F-3) again to stop playback. 17
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the F-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET
recorded contents in the message are played. PLAY
18
t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen. 19
20
21
94
■ Programming a memory name

Memory messages can be tagged with alphanumeric
names of up to 30 characters each.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols

(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _ –
@) and spaces can be used. (See the table below.)
q Record a message as described in page 94.

w During the voice mic. record screen display, push 123 abc NAME T1..T4
[NAME] (F-5) to enter memory name edit condi- Symbol ABC F-5 F-6 Keypad
tion.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
e Push [T1..T4] (F-6) several times to select the
desired voice message.
r Input the desired character by rotating the main
dial or by pushing the band key for number input.
• Push [ABC] (MF6) or [abc] (MF6) to toggle capital and
small letters.
• Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numer-
als and symbols. DEL SPACE
• Push [Ω] (F-1) or [≈] (F-2) for cursor movement.

• Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character. • Voice mic. record screen
• Push [SPACE] (F-4) to input a space.
• Pushing the transceiver’s keypad, [0]–[9] and [.] can
also enter numerals.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to input and set the name.
• The cursor disappears.
y Repeat steps e to t to program another voice
message’s name, if desired.
u Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder
screen.
• Usable characters
Key selection Editable characters
Voice memory name editing example
a to z (small letters)
0 to 9 (numbers)
!#$%&¥?“‘`^+–✱/
.,:;=<>()[]{}¦_–@

When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] (A) con-
nector on the front panel, the memory name can also
be edited from the keyboard.
95
■ Sending a recorded message

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi- T1 T2 T3 T4 T/R
function screens, if necessary. F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-6
w S elect a phone mode by pushing [SSB] or
[AM/FM].
e Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder
screen.
• If the receive voice message appears, push [T/R] (F-6)
to select TX message (T1–T4).
r Push the desired message switch, [T1] (F-1) to
[T4] (F-4), momentarily to transmit the contents.
SSB F-2 AM/FM EXIT/SET
• The transceiver transmits automatically.
• “ ” indicator appears and the memory timer
counts down.
VOICE
1
• You hear the transmitted message from the speaker
as the default. This can be turned OFF in the voice set 2
mode. (p. 97)
t Push the selected message switch, [T1] (F-1) to 3
[T4] (F-4), again to stop, if desired.
• The transceiver returns to receive automatically when 4
all of the recorded contents in the message are trans-
mitted.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice memory
5
screen.
6
For your information Appears Counts down
When an external keypad is connected to [MIC] con- 7
nector on the front panel, or one of [F1]−[F4] key of
the keyboard that is connected to the [USB] (A) con- 8
nector on the front panel is pushed, the recorded
message, T1–T4, can be transmitted without open- 9
ing the voice recorder screen.
See pages 18, 133, 134 for details. 10
D Transmit level setting 11
T1 T2 T3 T4 DEF
q Call up the voice recorder screen as described
above.
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-6 12
w Push [TX LEV.] (F-5) to select the voice memory
transmit level set condition.
13
e Push the desired message switch, [T1] (F-1) to
[T4] (F-4), momentarily to transmit the contents. 14
• The transceiver transmits automatically.
• “ ” indicator appears and the memory timer 15
counts down.
r Rotate the main dial to adjust the transmit voice F-5
TX LEV.
EXIT/SET Main dial
16
level.
default condition.
17
t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the voice recorder
screen. 18
19
Appears Adjust the transmit voice level
from 0 to 100 %.
20
21
96
■ Voice set mode

Sets the automatic monitor function, short play and DEF SET
normal recording times for voice recorder. F-4 F-6

screen.
e Push [EXIT/SET] to select voice recorder menu.
r Push [SET] (F-6) to select the voice set mode
screen. F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial
t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired VOICE /
item.
y Rotate the main dial to set the desired condition or
value.
condition or value.
u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the voice set mode
screen.
Auto Monitor ON
Turn on the automatic monitor function for recorded • ON : Monitors transmit audio automatically when
audio contents transmission. sending a recorded audio.
• OFF : Monitors transmit audio only when the mon-
itor function is in use.
Short Play Time 5s

Set the desired time period for one-touch playback • 3 to 10 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.
(when [PLAY] is pushed momentarily). (default: 5 sec.)
Normal Rec Time 15s

Set the desired time period for one-touch recording • 5 to 15 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.
(when [REC] is pushed momentarily). (default: 15 sec.)
97
■ Saving a voice message into the USB-Memory

D Saving the received audio memory
The recorded RX memory contents can be saved into The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom.
the USB-Memory.
q During voice recorder RX memory screen display,

123 DEL SPACE T/R
push [SAVE] (F-5) to select voice file save screen.
Symbol ABC F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-6
played. If the TX message (T1–T4) appears, push
[T/R] (F-6) to select RX message.
w Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name: 1
dition. 2
• Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the F-1 F-4 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial
file name, if necessary. DIR/FILE EDIT SAVE 3
x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then
rotate the main dial to select the character.
• Voice recorder RX memory screen 4
• [ABC] (MF6) : A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^ 5
– ( ) { } _ – @ can be selected.
• Push [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push [≈] 6
(F-2) to move the cursor right, push [DEL] (F-3)
to delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to
insert a space.
• Voice file save screen— file name edit 7
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.
8
• Saving location
9
z P ush [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view
screen. MAKE REN DEL 10
x Select the desired directory or folder in the
USB-Memory. 11
• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select folder in the 12
same directory.
13
• Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder.
F-2 F-3 F-4
14
the folder.
• Push and hold [MAKE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to mak- 15
ing a new folder. (Edit the name with the same • While saving
16
name.
e Push [SAVE] (F-5).
17
• After the saving is completed, return to voice recorder
RX memory screen automatically. 18
D Saving the TX memory 19
The TX memory contents can also be saved into the When a PC keyboard is connected to the [USB] con-
USB-Memory. However, the contents are saved with nector on the front panel, the file name can also be 20
the message list, set mode conditions, etc. at the edited from the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is
same time. See page 139 for details. required. 21
98
6 MEMORY OPERATION
■ Memory channels
The transceiver has 101 memory channels. The All 101 memory channels are tunable, which means
Memory mode is very useful to quickly change to the programmed frequency can be tuned temporarily
often-used frequencies. with the main dial, etc. in memory mode.
MEMORY
MEMORY TRANSFER OVER-
CHANNEL CAPABILITY CLEAR
CHANNEL TO VFO WRITING
NUMBER
Regular memory One frequency and one mode in each
1–99 Yes Yes Yes
channels memory channel.
Scan edge One frequency and one mode in each
memory P1, P2 memory channel as scan edges for Yes Yes No
channels programmed scan.
■ Memory channel selection

D Using the [∫]/[√] keys
q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the memory mode.
w Push [∫]/[√] several times to select the desired
memory channel.
• Push and hold [∫]/[√] for continuous scrolling.
• [UP] and [DN] on the microphone can also be used.
e To return to VFO mode, push [VFO/MEMO] again.
VFO/MEMO
D Using the keypad

q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select the memory mode. Keypad F-INP ENT
w Push [F-INP ENT].

e Enter the desired memory channel number using
the keypad.
• Enter 100 or 101 to select scan edge channel P1 or P2,
respectively.
r Push [∫] or [√] to set the memory channel.
[EXAMPLE] VFO/MEMO
To select memory channel 3;
- Push [F-INP ENT], [7 3], then push [∫] or [√].
To select memory channel 12;
- Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [3.5 2], then push [∫] or
[√].
To select the scan edge channel P1;
- Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [50 0], [50 0], then push
[∫] or [√].
To select the scan edge channel P2;
- Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [50 0], [1.8 1], then push
[∫] or [√].
99
MEMORY OPERATION 6
■ Memory list screen

The memory list screen simultaneously shows 7
memory channels and their programmed contents. 13
memory channels can be displayed in the wide mem-
ory list screen.
You can select a desired memory channel from the

memory list screen.
D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi- WIDE
function screens.
w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select the memory list
F-6
1
screen.
• Push [WIDE] (F-6) to switch between the standard and 2
wide screens.
e While pushing and holding [SET] (F-2), rotate the 3
main dial to select the desired memory channel.
• [∫] and [√] can also be used.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen.
4
Main dial
F-2
SET
F-4
MEMORY
EXIT/SET
5
• Memory list screen 6
7
8
9
D Confirming programmed memory channels
q Select the memory list screen as described above. 10
w While pushing [ROLL] (F-1), rotate the main dial to
scroll the screen. 11
e Push [SET] (F-2) to select the highlighted memory
channel.
• “≈” appears beside the selected memory channel num-
12
ber in the memory list screen and the selected memory
channel contents are displayed below the frequency F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial
13
readout.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen.
ROLL SET
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
100
6 MEMORY OPERATION
■ Memory channel programming

Memory channel can be programmed in either the
VFO mode or the memory mode.
D Programming in the VFO mode

q Set the desired frequency, operating mode and fil-
ter width in the VFO mode.
w Push [∫]/[√] several times to select the desired
memory channel.
• The Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the
desired channel. (p. 100)
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout). MW
• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a
blank channel (and does not have any contents). [EXAMPLE]:
e Push and hold [MW] for 1 sec. to program the dis- Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into memory channel 12.
played frequency, operating mode, etc., into the
memory channel.
7 3 SSB
or
Beep
MW Beep Push for 1 sec.
Beep
D Programming in the memory mode [EXAMPLE]:

q Select the desired memory channel with [∫]/[√] in Programming 21.280 MHz/USB into memory channel 19.
the memory mode.
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout instead of the frequency readout.
• Nothing is displayed if the selected memory channel is
an empty channel. or then 21 7 SSB
w Set the desired frequency and operating mode.

• To program a blank channel, use direct frequency entry
with the keypad or memo pads, etc. (p. 28)
e Push and hold [MW] for 1 sec. to program the dis- Beep
MW Beep Push for 1 sec.
played frequency and operating mode into the Beep
memory channel.
101
MEMORY OPERATION 6
■ Frequency transfers
The frequency and operating mode in a memory
channel can be transferred to the VFO in either VFO
mode or memory mode.
D Transferring in the VFO mode

This is useful for transferring programmed contents to
a VFO.
q Select the VFO mode by pushing [VFO/MEMO].

w Select the memory channel to be transferred with TRANSFER EXAMPLE IN VFO MODE
Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (VFO)
[∫]/[√].
• The Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW 1
desired channel.
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan- 2
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a
blank channel. In this case transferring is not possible.
or 3
e Push and hold [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. to transfer
the frequency and operating mode.
4
• Transferred frequency and operating mode appear on
the frequency readout. Beep 5
VFO/MEMO Beep Push for 1 sec.
6
Beep
7
D Transferring in the memory mode
8
This is useful for transferring the frequency and oper-
ating mode while operating in the memory mode.
9
When you have changed the frequency or operat-
10
ing mode in the selected memory channel:
• Displayed frequency, mode and filter setting are
11
transferred.
• Programmed frequency, mode and filter in the 12
memory channel are not transferred, and they
remain in the memory channel. 13
q Select the memory channel to be transferred with 14
[∫]/[√] in memory mode. TRANSFER EXAMPLE IN MEMORY MODE
• Then, set the frequency or operating mode if required. VFO frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB
Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW
15
w Push and hold [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. to transfer
the frequency, mode and filter.
• Displayed frequency, mode and filter are transferred to
16
the VFO.
e T o return to VFO mode, push [VFO/MEMO] VFO/MEMO
Beep
Beep Push for 1 sec.
17
momentarily.
18
Beep
19
Programmed contents appear.
20
21
102
6 MEMORY OPERATION
■ Memory names
All memory channels (including scan edges) can be
tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 10 charac-
ters each.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols

(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _ –
@) and space can be used.
D Editing (programming) memory names

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi- NAME
function screens, if necessary. 123 abc MEMORY

w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list screen. Symbol ABC F-4 Keypad
e Select the desired memory channel with [∫]/[√].
r Push [NAME] (F-4) to edit memory channel name.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
• Memory channel names of blank channels cannot be
edited.
t Input the desired character by rotating the main
dial or by pushing the keypad for number input.
• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-
bols. DEL SPACE
• Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to input and set the name.
• The cursor disappears.
u Repeat steps e to y to program another memory
channel’s name, if desired.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen.

When a PC keyboard is connected to a [USB] (A)
connector on the front panel, the memory name can
also be edited from the keyboard.
■ Memory clearing
Any unused memory channels can be cleared.
The cleared memory channels become blank chan-
nels.
q Select memory mode with [VFO/MEMO].

w P ush [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list
F-4 F-5 VFO/MEMO
screen.
MEMORY CLR
e Select the desired memory channel with [∫]/[√].
r Push and hold [CLR] (F-5) for 1 sec. to clear the
contents.
• The programmed frequency, operating mode and filter
disappear. Beep
t To clear other memory channels, repeat steps e F-5 (CLR) Beep Push for 1 sec.
Beep
and r.
103
MEMORY OPERATION 6
■ Memo pads
The transceiver has a memo pad function to store
frequency and operating mode for easy writing and
recalling. The memo pads are separate from the
memory channels.
The default number of memo pads is 5. If desired,
however, this can be increased to 10 in the set mode.
(p. 132)
MP-W MP-R
Memo pads are convenient when you want to mem-
orize a frequency and operating mode temporarily,
such as when you find a DX station in a pile-up, or
when a desired station is busy for a long time and you 1
want to temporarily search for other stations.
Use the transceiver’s memo pads instead of relying 2
on hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced.
3
D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads
You can store the readout frequency and operating
4
mode by pushing [MP-W]. MP-W
5
When you store the 6th frequency and operating Newest
mode, the oldest stored entries are automatically 6
erased, to make room for the new settings.
7
ach memo pad must have its own unique combi-
E
nation of frequency and operating mode; memo 8
pads having identical settings cannot be written.
9
Oldest
10
Erased 11
In this example, 21.276 MHz (USB) will be erased
when 7.067 MHz (LSB) is written. 12
D Calling up a frequency and operating mode from a memo pad 13
You can call up the desired contents of a memo pad
by pushing [MP-R] several times.
MP-R
14
• Both VFO and memory modes can be used.
• The frequency and operating mode are called up, starting
from the most recently written.
Newest 15
When you call up the memo pads with [MP-R], the 16
previously displayed frequency and operating mode
are automatically stored in a temporary pad. The tem- 17
porary pad can be recalled by pushing [MP-R] sev-
eral times. 18
• You may think there are 6 memo pads because 6 different
frequencies (5 are in memo pads and 1 is in the tempo-
rary pad) are called up by [MP-R].
MP-R
19
Oldest
If you change the frequency or operating mode MEMO PADS 20

called up from a memo pad with the main dial, etc.,
those in the temporary pad are erased.
21
104
7 SCANS
■ Scan types • The scan function can be used on the main read-
out only.
• You can perform a scan while operating on a fre-
quency using the dualwatch or split functions.
PROGRAMMED SCAN ∂F SCAN

Repeatedly scans between two scan edge frequencies Repeatedly scans within ∂F span area.
(scan edge memory channels P1 and P2).
Scan edge Scan edge Start frequency

P1 or P2 P2 or P1 –∂F frequency +∂F frequency
Scan Scan
Scan
Jump Jump
This scan operates in the VFO mode. This scan operates in both the VFO and memory modes.
MEMORY SCAN SELECT MEMORY SCAN

Repeatedly scans all programmed memory channels. Repeatedly scans all or one of 3 select memory channels.
Blank channel Blank channel
Mch 2 Mch 3 Mch 4 Mch 2 Mch 3 Mch 4

�2 �1 �2 �1
Mch 1 *“�1,” “�2” and “�3” show that the channel Mch 5 Mch 1 *“�1,” “�2” and “�3” show that the channel Mch 5
�1 is specified as the select memory. �1 �1 is specified as the select memory. �1
Mch 99 Mch 7 Mch 6 Mch 99 Mch 7 Mch 6

�1 �1 �3 �1 �1 �3
This scan operates in the memory mode. This scan operates in the memory mode.
■ Preparation
• Channels • Squelch condition
For programmed scan: ❍ Scan starts with the squelch open
Program scan edge frequencies into scan edge mem- For programmed scan:
ory channels P1 and P2. (p. 101) When the tuning step is 1 kHz or less:
The scan continues until it is stopped manually— it
For ∂F scan:
does not pause* even if signals are detected.
Set the ∂F span (∂F scan range) in the scan screen. * The scan is paused when the squelch is closed and then
For memory scan: opened (scan resumes after 10 sec. has passed when
Program 2 or more memory channels except scan the scan resume is ON; the scan is cancelled when the
edge memory channels. scan resume is OFF).
For select memory scan: When the tuning step is more than 5 kHz:
Designate 2 or more memory channels as Select The scan pauses on each step when the scan
memory channels. To designate the channel as a resume is ON; not applicable when the scan resume
Select memory channel, choose a memory channel, is OFF.
then push [SELECT] (F-3) in the scan screen (mem- For memory scan:
ory mode) or in the memory list screen. Scan pauses on each channel when the scan resume
is ON; not applicable when the scan resume is OFF.
• Scan resume ON/OFF
You can select the scan to resume or cancel when detect-
❍ Scan starts with squelch closed
ing a signal in the scan set mode. Scan resume ON/OFF
Scan stops when a signal is detected.
must be set before performing a scan. See p. 106 for ON/ • If the scan resume is set to ON in the scan set mode, the
OFF setting and scan resume condition details. scan pauses for 10 sec. when detecting a signal, then
resumes. When a signal disappears while scan is paused,
• Scan speed scan resumes 2 sec. later.
Scan speed can be selected from 2 levels, high or low,
in the scan set mode. See p. 106 for details.
105
SCANS 7
■ Scan set mode

The scan speed and the scan resume condition can SCAN SET
be set using the scan set mode. F-5 F-6
q Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select scan screen.

w Push [SET] (F-6) to select the scan set mode.
item.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition.
default setting. F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial
t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to scan menu.
DEF
1
2
3
4
5
Scan Speed HIGH
Select the desired scan speed between high and • HIGH : scan is faster. 6
low. • LOW : scan is slower.
7
Scan Resume ON 8
Set the scan resume function ON or OFF. • ON : When detecting a signal, scan pauses for
10 sec., then resumes. When a signal dis- 9
appears, scan resumes 2 sec. later.
• OFF : When detecting a signal, cancels scanning. 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
106
7 SCANS
■ Programmed scan operation

w Select the VFO mode.
• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning.
r Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.
t Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. [RF/SQL] F-1 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial
• See p. 105 for squelch condition. PROG SCAN
• If the [RF/SQL] control function is set as “AUTO,” the RECALL
squelch is always open in the SSB, CW, RTTY and
PSK modes. (pgs. 2, 33, 128)
y Push [PROG] (F-1) to start the programmed scan.
• “ ” and decimal points blink while
scanning.
u W hen the scan detects a signal, scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch status.
i To cancel the scan, push [PROG] (F-1).
• Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.
o Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall
the frequency that is set before starting the scan, if
desired.
If the same frequencies are programmed into the

scan edge memory channel P1 and P2, pro-
grammed scan will not start.
■ ∂F scan operation
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi- SCAN / RECALL
function screens, if necessary. F-5
w Select VFO mode or a memory channel.
• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning.
r Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.
t Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.
• See p. 105 for squelch condition.
• If the [RF/SQL] control function is set as “AUTO,” the
squelch is always open in the SSB, CW, RTTY and [RF/SQL] F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET
PSK modes. (pgs. 2, 33, 128) ∂F ∂F SPAN
y Set the ∂F span by pushing [∂F SPAN] (F-4).
• ± 5 kHz, ±10 kHz, ±20 kHz, ±50 kHz, ±100 kHz,
±500 kHz and ±1000 kHz are selectable.
u Rotate the main dial to set a center frequency of
the ∂F span.
i Push [∂F] (F-2) to start the ∂F scan.
• “ ” and decimal points blink while scanning.
o When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
ting and the squelch status.
!0 To cancel the scan, push [∂F] (F-2).
!1 Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall
the frequency that was set before starting the scan.
107
SCANS 7
■ Fine programmed scan/Fine ∂F scan

In fine scan (programmed or ∂F), the scan speed
decreases when the squelch opens, but the trans-
ceiver keeps scanning. The scanning tuning step
shifts from 50 Hz to 10 Hz when the squelch opens.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi- ∂F FINE

w Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.
e Set for programmed scan or ∂F scan as described
on the previous page.
r Push [PROG] (F-1) or [∂F] (F-2) to start a scan.
• “ ” or “ ” and decimal 1
points blink while scanning.
t Push [FINE] (F-3) to start a fine scan.
• “ ” or “ ”
2
blinks instead of “
respectively.
” or “ ,”
PROG SCAN 3
y When the scan detects a signal, the scan speed RECALL
decreases but scan does not stop. 4

u Push [PROG] (F-1) or [∂F] (F-2) to stop the scan;
push [FINE] (F-3) to cancel the fine scan. 5
i Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall 6
the frequency that is set before starting the scan, if
desired. 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
108
7 SCANS
■ Memory scan operation

w Select memory mode.
e Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen.
r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.
squelch is always open in the SSB, CW, RTTY and [RF/SQL] F-1 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial
PSK modes. (pgs. 2, 33, 128) MEMO SCAN
t Push [MEMO] (F-1) to start the memory scan.
• “ ” and decimal points blink while
scanning.
y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
ting and the squelch condition.
u To cancel the scan, push [MEMO] (F-1) .
2 or more memory channels must be programmed

for a memory scan to start.
■ Select memory scan operation

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi- SEL No. SCAN
r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed.
squelch is always open in the SSB, CW, RTTY and
PSK modes. (pgs. 2, 33, 128)
t Push [MEMO] (F-1) to start the memory scan.
• “ ” and decimal points blink while [RF/SQL] F-1 F-3 EXIT/SET Main dial
scanning. MEMO SELECT
ush [SEL No.] (F-4) several times to select the
y P
select scan number from ★1, ★2, ★3 and ★1,2,3.
u Push [SELECT] (F-3) to start select memory scan;
push [SELECT] (F-3) again to return to memory
scan, if desired.
• “ ” blinks instead of
“ ” during a select memory scan.
i When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
ting and the squelch condition.
o To cancel the scan, push [MEMO] (F-1).
2 or more memory channels must be designated

as select memory channels, as well as the same
select scan channel number, for select memory
scan to start.
109
SCANS 7
■ Setting select memory channels

D Setting in scan screen SELECT MEMORY
F-3 F-4
r Select the desired memory channel to set as a
select memory channel.
• [∫]/[√] keys and direct keypad selections can be used.
(p. 99)
t P ush [SELECT] (F-3) several times to set the F-1 F-2 F-5 EXIT/SET VFO/MEMO
memory channel as a select memory ★1, ★2, ★3
or not.
ROLL SET SCAN
1
• “★1,” “★2” or “★3” appears on the LCD to show that • Scan screen
the channel is specified as the select memory. 2
y Repeat steps r to t to program another memory
channel as a select memory channel. 3
u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scan screen.
4
D Setting in memory list screen 5
function screens, if necessary. 6
w P ush [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list
• Memory list screen
screen. 7
e Rotate the main dial while pushing [ROLL] (F-1) or
[SET] (F-2) to select the desired memory channel.
• [∫]/[√] keys and direct keypad selections can be used.
8
(p. 99)
r P ush [SELECT] (F-3) several times to set the 9
memory channel as a select memory ★1, ★2, ★3
or not. 10
• “★1,” “★2” or “★3” appears on the LCD to show that
the channel is specified as the select memory. 11
t Repeat steps e to r to program another memory
channel as a select memory channel. 12
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen. SELECT MEMORY SCAN
F-3 F-4 F-5
13
D Erasing the select scan setting
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi- 14
w P ush [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list 15
screen, or push [SCAN] (F-5) to select scan
screen. 16
e Push and hold [SELECT] (F-3) for 1 sec. to display
17
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 EXIT/SET
memory select all clear window.
★1 ★2 ★3 ★1,2,3
r Push one of the following keys to clear all select
scan settings. 18
[★1] (F-1) : Clears all ★1 settings.
[★2] (F-2) : Clears all ★2 settings. 19
[★3] (F-3) : Clears all ★3 settings.
[★1,2,3] (F-4) : Clears all select settings. 20
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen.
21
110
7 SCANS
■ Tone scan
The transceiver can detect subaudible tones in a
received signal. By monitoring a signal that is being
transmitted on a repeater input frequency, you can
determine the tone frequency required to access the
repeater.
q Set the desired frequency or memory channel to DEF T-SCAN

be checked for a tone frequency. TONE F-4 F-6
w P ush [AM/FM] several times to select the FM
mode.
e Push and hold [TONE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to select
the tone frequency screen.
r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to check the repeater
tone frequency or tone squelch frequency, respec-
tively.
t Push [T-SCAN] (F-6) to start the tone scan. F-1 F-2 AM/FM EXIT/SET
• “SCAN” blinks while scanning.
y When a matching tone frequency is detected, the
tone scan pauses.
• The tone frequency is set temporarily on a memory
channel. Program the memory channel to store the
tone frequency permanently.
• The decoded tone frequency is used for the repeater
tone frequency or tone squelch frequency.
u To stop the scan, push [T-SCAN] (F-6).
default frequency.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit tone frequency screen.
111
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 8
■ Automatic antenna selection
The transceiver covers 0.03–60 MHz over 10 bands.
Each band key has a band memory which can mem-
orize a selected antenna (ANT1, ANT2, ANT1/RX
antenna and ANT2/RX antenna). When you change
the operating frequency beyond a band, the previ-
ously used antenna is automatically selected. This
function is convenient when you use 2 or 3 antennas.
To use the band memory, select the set mode and

confirm that “Auto” is selected as the [ANT] switch
option. (p. 130)
1
• Antenna selection mode: “Auto” (default) RX 3.5/7 MHz 21/28/50 MHz
The antenna tuner ON/OFF condition is also memo- only bands bands 2
rized in the band memory.
ANT1 ANT2 3
[Example]: a 3.5/7 MHz antenna is connected to
[ANT1], a 21/28/50 MHz antenna is connected to 4
[ANT2]. When the antenna selector function is set to
“Auto,” an antenna is automatically selected when the
transceiver changes bands.
5
RX ANT
IN 6
• Antenna selection mode: “Manual”
[ANT] (MF1) functions, however, band memory does 7
not function. In this case, you must select an antenna
8
ANT
manually.
When using an external antenna selector for more
than 3 antennas (except for a receive antenna), 9
“Manual” should be selected as the [ANT] switch the
set mode item. (p. 130) 10
NOTE: When “Auto” or “Manual” is selected, the 11
antenna tuner ON/OFF condition is consistent with
[ANT] (MF1). 12
• Antenna selection mode: “OFF”
[ANT] (MF1) does not function and [ANT1] is always
13
selected.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
112
8 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
■ Antenna tuner operation

The internal automatic antenna tuner automatically
matches the transceiver to the connected antenna. NOTES:
After the tuner matches an antenna, the variable capac- • NEVER transmit without an antenna properly con-
itor settings are memorized as a preset point for each nected to antenna port in use.
frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore, when you • W hen 2 antennas are connected, select the
change the frequency range, the variable capacitors are antenna to be used with [ANT] (MF1).
automatically preset to the memorized setting. • If the SWR is higher than about 1.5:1 when tun-
ing farther than 100 kHz from an antenna’s pro-
CAUTION: NEVER transmit with the tuner ON grammed preset point, push and hold [TUNER] for
when no antenna is connected. This will damage 1 sec. to start manual tuning.
the transceiver. Be careful of the antenna selection. • The internal tuner may not be able to tune in the
AM mode. In such cases, push and hold [TUNER]
4 For your convenience for 1 sec. to manually tune.
When you purchase a brand-new antenna, or you want
to change the antenna settings, you can erase the all
of the internal antenna tuner preset points with “Tuner
Preset Memory Clear” in the Others set mode. (p. 130)
D Tuner operation
➥ Push [TUNER] to turn the internal antenna tuner
ON. The antenna is automatically tuned when the TUNER
antenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1.
• When the tuner is ON, the indicator on the switch
lights green.
• While tuning, the indicator on the switch blinks.
D Manual tuning
During SSB operation at low voice levels, the internal
tuner may not automatically tune correctly. In such
cases, manual tuning is helpful.
➥ Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec., to start man-
ual tuning.
• A sidetone is emitted and the indicator on the
switch blinks red while tuning.
• If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than
1.5:1 after 20 sec. of tuning, the indicator on the
switch goes out.
❍ If the tuner cannot tune the antenna, check the ❍ Tuning a narrow bandwidth antenna
following and try again: Some antennas, especially for the low bands, have
• the [ANT] connector selection. a narrow bandwidth. These antennas may not be
• the antenna connection and feedline. tuned beyond the edge of their operating bandwidth,
• the untuned antenna SWR. (Less than 3:1 for HF therefore, tune such an antenna as follows:
bands; Less than 2.5:1 for 50 MHz band)
• the transmit power. (8 W for HF bands; 15 W for [Example]: S uppose you have an antenna which
50 MHz band) has an SWR of 1.5:1 at 3.55 MHz and
• the power source voltage/capacity. an SWR of 3:1 at 3.8 MHz.
If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1
q Set 3.55 MHz and push and hold [TUNER] for
after checking the above, perform the following:
1 sec. to start manual tuning.
• repeat manual tuning several times.
w Set 3.80 MHz and push and hold [TUNER] for
• adjust the antenna feedline length. (This is effective
1 sec. to start manual tuning.
for higher frequencies in some cases.)
Even if the manual tune does not tune the antenna
and the tuner turns OFF the first time, it may tune the
antenna the second time.
113
ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 8
• Automatic tuner start (HF bands only) • PTT tuner start

If you want to deactivate the tuner under conditions Tuning of the internal*/external antenna tuner starts
of VSWR 1.5:1 or less, use the auto tuner start func- when [PTT] is pushed on a new frequency (more than
tion and turn the tuner OFF. This function activates 1% away from the last-tuned frequency). This func-
the tuner automatically when the SWR is high, and tion removes the “push and hold [TUNER]” operation
is controlled in set mode. (p. 129). and activates for the first transmission on a new fre-
• The tuner may not be activated if the TX power is not quency.
output stably longer than the specified time period as the *Tuning starts if the internal antenna tuner is ON.
SSB or CW mode operation. This function is turned ON in set mode. (p. 129).
1
■ Optional external tuner operation
2
• AH-4 HF AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER • AH-4 operation
The AH-4 matches the IC-7600 to a long wire antenna Tuning is required for each frequency. Be sure to 3
more than 7 m/23 ft long (3.5 MHz and above). re-tune the antenna before transmitting when you
• See p. 18 for the transceiver and AH-4 connection. change the frequency— even slightly. 4
• See the AH-4 instruction manual for AH-4 installa-
tion and antenna connection details. q Set the desired frequency in an HF or 50 MHz
band for use with the AH-4.
5
AH-4 setting example: • The AH-4 will not operate on frequencies outside
of ham bands.
6
For mobile operation
w Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec.
Optional AH-2b
antenna element • The indicator on the switch blinks while tuning.
7
TUNER
8
9
For outdoor operation
10
Long wire
11
e The indicator on the switch lights constantly when
tuning is complete. 12
• When the connected wire cannot be tuned, the
indicator on the switch goes out and the AH-4 is 13
R DANGER: HIGH VOLTAGE! bypassed. At that point the antenna wire connec-
NEVER touch the antenna element while tuning tion is to the transceiver directly, and not via the
AH-4 antenna tuner.
14
or transmitting.
r To bypass the AH-4 manually, push [TUNER].
15
NEVER operate the AH-4 without an antenna wire.
OTE: PTT tuner function is also available. See
N
The tuner and transceiver will be damaged.
p. 129 for details. 16
NEVER operate the AH-4 when it is not grounded.
Transmitting before tuning may damage the trans- • Antenna tuner of the IC-PW1/EURO 17
ceiver. Note that the AH-4 cannot tune when using a When using an external antenna tuner such as the IC-
½λ long wire or multiple of the operating frequency. PW1/EURO’s tuner, tune with the external antenna 18
tuner, while the internal tuner is turned OFF. After tun-
hen connecting the AH-4, the antenna connector
W ing is completed, turn the internal tuner ON. 19
assignments are [ANT2] for the internal tuner and Otherwise, both tuners tune simultaneously and cor-
[ANT1] for the AH-4. The antenna indicator in the rect tuning may not be obtained. 20
LCD displays “ANT1(EXT)” when the AH-4 is con- See the instruction manual included with each
nected and selected. antenna tuner for their respective operations. 21
114
9 CLOCK AND TIMERS
■ Clock set mode

SET The IC-7600 has a built-in calendar and 24-hour
F-6 clock (accuracy ±75 sec. per month) with daily power
ON/OFF timer functions. Before operating these timer
functions, set the current date and time.
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-

tion screen, if necessary.
screen.
F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select the time set mode.
CLOCK / TIME
r Push [CLOCK] (F-1) to select the clock set mode.
t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired
item, then rotate the main dial to set or select the
desired value or condition.
• Pushing [Ω ≈] (F-3) may be necessary for some items.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) to select a default condition
or value.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the time set mode.
Date 2000 – 1 – 1 ( Sat )

Sets the date. z Push [Ω ≈] (F-3) to select between the year and the
month/day, then rotate the main dial to select them.
• The date setting and “DATE-set Push [SET]” indica-
tors blink.
x Push [SET] (F-5) to set the date.
Time (Now) 0:00

Sets the local time. z Rotate the main dial to set the local time.
• The time setting and “TIME-set Push [SET]” indica-
tors blink.
x Push [SET] (F-5) to set the time.
CLOCK2 Function ON
Turns the CLOCK2 indicator ON and OFF. • ON : The CLOCK2 indicator is displayed below
CLOCK2 is convenient to display UTC or other the local time display.
country’s local time, etc. • OFF : The CLOCK2 indicator does not display.
CLOCK2 Offset ± 0:00

Sets the desired off-set time period for CLOCK2 dis-
play within –24:00 to +24:00 in 5 min. steps.
CLOCK2 Name UTC

Sets the desired 3-character name for CLOCK2. z Push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the name edit condition.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some sym- • The cursor under the 1st character blinks.
bols (! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ ⁄ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ x P ush [ABC]/[abc] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol]
_ – @) and spaces can be used. (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate
the main dial to select the character.
• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and symbols.
• Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the name.
115
CLOCK AND TIMERS 9
■ Daily timer setting

TIMER1 TIMER2 TIMER3 TIMER4 TIMER5 SET
The transceiver turns power ON and/or OFF automat-
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
ically on the specified day and time, with the specified
frequency settings.

screen.
e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select the time set mode.
r Push [TIMER] (F-2) to select the timer set mode.
F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial t Push one of [TIMER1] (F-1) to [TIMER5] (F-5) to
TIMER TIME select the desired timer. 1
y Rotate the main dial to select the timer action ON
• Timer set mode screen or OFF. 2
u Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “DAY” cell, then rotate
the main dial to select the desired day of the week.
• Select “– – –” not to specify the day of the week. The
3
timer will function every day in this case.
• Once a day of the week is selected, push [CLR] (F-4) 4
to select “– – –.”
• During [Timer1] is selected
i Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “REPEAT” cell, then 5
rotate the main dial to select the repeat function
ON or OFF. 6
• ON : The timer functions every selected day of
the week (repeats). 7
• OFF : The timer does not repeat.
o Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “ON” cell, then rotate 8
the main dial to set the desired transceiver power
ON time.
• When using power OFF timer only, push [CLR] (F-4)
9
to select “– – – –.” This setting cannot be set when the
power OFF timer is set to “– – – –.” 10
!0 Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “OFF” cell, then rotate
F-1 F-2 F-4 F-6
the main dial to set the desired transceiver power 11
CLR SET OFF time.
• When using power ON timer only, push [CLR] (F-4) to 12
select “– – – –.” This setting cannot be set when the
power ON timer is set to “– – – –.”
!1 Push [≈] (F-2) to select the “Mch” cell, then rotate
13
the main dial to select the desired memory channel
number.
14
• If using the currently set VFO condition, push [CLR] (F-4)
to select “– – –.” 15
!2 Push [SET] (F-6) to set the timer.
• The timer indicator appears. 16
!3 Repeat steps t to !2 to set other timers, if desired.
!4 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit timer set screen. 17
18
19
20
21
116
9 CLOCK AND TIMERS
■ Setting sleep timer

TIMER SET / SLEEP The sleep timer turns the transceiver power OFF
POWER F-6 automatically after passing the set period. The timer
can be set to 5–120 min. in 5 min. steps.
The sleep timer function counts the ‘minute’ units,

and does not count the ‘second’ units. For exam-
ple, when the sleep timer is started at 12:00 59,
First one minute past for just 1 sec. The maximum
error is therefore 59 sec. This is normal, not a mal-
F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial function.
TIMER TIME / CLR
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close the multi-
• Sleep timer set condition function screen, if necessary.
screen.
e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select the time set mode.
r Push [TIMER] (F-2) to select the timer set mode.
t Push [SLEEP] (F-6) to select the sleep timer set
screen.
• “– – –” blinks.
y Set the desired time period using the main dial.
• “TIMER–set Push [SET]” blinks.
• Push [CLR] (F-4) to select “– – –” to cancel the setting.
u Push [SET] (F-6) to set the time.
• Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel the setting.
• The timer indicator appears.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit timer set screen.
o The transceiver sounds 10 beeps and turns OFF
after the sleep timer period elapses.
• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.
• Push [POWER] momentarily to cancel the sleep timer.
■ Timer operation
TIMER q Preset the daily timer as described previously to
POWER
turn the timer function ON.
• The timer indicator appears.
w Push and hold [POWER] for 1 sec. to turn the power
OFF.
• The indicator on this switch lights red when the timer
function is ON.
e When the set time arrives, the power is automati-
cally turned ON.
r The transceiver sounds 10 beeps and turns OFF
Appears
after the power-off period elapses.
• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.
• Push [POWER] momentarily to turn the timer function
OFF, if desired.
Timer action in the timer set screen must be set to

ON to enable the timer operation, described in page
116 step y.
117
SET MODE 10
■ Set mode description
The set mode is used for programming infrequently
changed values or conditions of functions. The IC-
7600 has a level set mode, display set mode, time
set mode, accessory set mode, others set mode and
USB-Memory set menu.
D Set mode operation

LEVEL ACC DISP TIME OTHERS USB
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
w P ush [SET] (F-6) to select the set mode menu
screen.
• Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects 1
the set mode menu screen.
e Push [LEVEL] (F-1), [ACC] (F-2), [DISP] (F-3), 2
[TIME] (F-4), [OTHERS] (F-5) or [USB] (F-6) to
select the desired set mode. 3
r For level, accessory, display and Others set mode,
EXIT/SET F-6 push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle wide and normal
screen.
4
SET
• Set mode screen

item, then rotate the main dial to adjust/select the
5

desired value or condition.
• Pushing [Ω ≈] (F-3) operation may be necessary for 6
some items.
• Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) select a default condition or 7
value.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the set mode. 8
WIDE
F-6
9
10
11
12
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4
DEF
Main dial
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
118
10 SET MODE
D Screen arrangement
• Display set mode (p. 126)
F-3
• Set mode menu screen (p. 118) • Time set mode (p. 115)
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-4
• Level set mode (p. 120) • Others set mode (p. 128)
F-5
• ACC set mode (p. 124) • USB-Memory set menu (p. 136)
F-2 F-6
119
SET MODE 10
■ Level set mode

SSB RX HPF/LPF ––– – –––
Sets the high-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in
100 Hz steps in the SSB mode. (default: OFF)
OTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items
N
will be reset to default value, ‘0.’
SSB RX Tone (Bass) 0

Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in the
SSB mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0) 1
2
SSB RX Tone (Treble) 0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in the 3
SSB mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
4
AM RX HPF/LPF ––– – –––
5
100 Hz steps in the AM mode. (default: OFF)
6
N 7
will be reset to default value, ‘0.’
8
AM RX Tone (Bass) 0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in the
9
AM mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
10
AM RX Tone (Treble) 0 11
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in the
AM mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0) 12
13
FM RX HPF/LPF ––– – –––
Sets the high-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and low- 14
100 Hz steps in the FM mode. (default: OFF) 15
N
will be reset to default value, ‘0.’ 16
FM RX Tone (Bass) 0
17
Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in the 18
FM mode from –5 to +5. (default: 0)
19
FM RX Tone (Treble) 0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in the
20
21
120
10 SET MODE
■ Level set mode (Continued)
CW RX HPF/LPF ––– – –––

100 Hz steps in the CW mode. (default: OFF)
RTTY RX HPF/LPF ––– – –––

100 Hz steps in the RTTY mode. (default: OFF)
PSK RX HPF/LPF ––– – –––

100 Hz steps in the PSK mode. (default: OFF)
SSB TX Tone (Bass) 0

Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in the
SSB TX Tone (Treble) 0

Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in the
AM TX Tone (Bass) 0
AM TX Tone (Treble) 0
FM TX Tone (Bass) 0
FM TX Tone (Treble) 0
121
SET MODE 10
SSB TBW (WIDE) 100 – 2900

Sets the transmission passband width to a wide set- • Lower freq. : 100 (default), 200, 300 and 500 Hz
ting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre- • Higher freq. : 2500, 2700, 2800 and
quencies. 2900 Hz (default)
SSB TBW (MID) 300 – 2700

Sets the transmission passband width to a middle • Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 (default) and 500 Hz
setting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre- • Higher freq. : 2500, 2700 (default), 2800
quencies. and 2900 Hz
1
SSB TBW (NAR) 500 – 2500 2
Sets the transmission passband width to a narrow
setting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre-
• Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz (default)
• Higher freq. : 2500 (default), 2700, 2800
3
quencies. and 2900 Hz
4
Drive Gain 50% 5
Sets the drive gain level from 0% to 100% in 1%
steps. (default: 50%)
6
While talking into the microphone, keying down or
transmitting, rotate the main dial so that the ALC 7
meter reading is between 30% to 50% of the ALC
scale. (p. 37) 8
The drive gain is active for all modes other than the
SSB mode with speech compressor OFF.
9
10
Speech Level 50%
Sets the voice synthesizer audio output level from
11
0% to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%)
12
Side Tone Level 50% 13
Sets the sidetone output level from 0% to 100% in 14
1% steps. (default: 50%)
15
Side Tone Level Limit ON
16
Turns the sidetone output level limiting capability ON • OFF : The CW sidetone level is linked to the [AF]
or OFF. (default: ON) control. 17
• ON : The CW sidetone level is limited with the
When this item is set to ON, the CW sidetone is
linked to the [AF] control until rotation of the [AF]
[AF] control. 18
control reaches to the specified level—further rota-
tion will not increase the volume of the CW sidet- 19
ones.
20
21
122
10 SET MODE
■ Level set mode (Continued)
Beep Level 50%

Sets the beep output level from 0% to 100% in 1%
steps. (default: 50%)
Beep Level Limit ON

Turns the beep tone output level limiting capability • OFF : Beep level is linked to the [AF] control.
ON or OFF for the confirmation and band edge beep • ON : Beep level is limited with the [AF] control.
tones. (default: ON)
When this item is set to ON, the beep tones are
linked to the [AF] control until rotation of the [AF]
control reaches to the specified level—further rota-
tion will not increase the volume of the beep tones.
123
SET MODE 10
■ ACC set mode

USB Audio SQL OFF (OPEN)
Sets the squelch condition of the USB audio which • OFF (OPEN) : The received audio is always output
is output from the [USB] (B) connector on the rear regardless of the squelch condition.
panel. (default)
The same audio signals are output from [USB] (B) • ON : The received audio is output accord-
and the ACC sockets. ing to the squelch condition (open/
• The beep tones and the voice synthesizer announce- close).
ments are not output.
• The received audio output level cannot be adjusted with
the [AF] control.
1
USB MOD Level 50%
2
Sets the input modulation level of the [USB] (B) con-
nector from 0% to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%) 3
DATA OFF MOD MIC,ACC 4
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation
input when data mode is not in use.
• MIC
• ACC
: Use the signals from [MIC].
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
5
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
(pin 4). (default)
6
• USB : Use the signals from [USB] (B).
7
DATA1 MOD ACC 8
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation
input when data 1 mode (D1) is in use.
• MIC
• ACC
: Use the signals from [MIC].
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
9
(default)
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
10
(pin 4).
• USB : Use the signals from [USB] (B). 11
12
DATA2 MOD MIC,ACC
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation • MIC : Use the signals from [MIC]. 13
input when data 2 mode (D2) is in use. • ACC : Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1] 14
(pin 4). (default)
16
DATA3 MOD MIC
Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation • MIC : Use the signals from [MIC]. (default) 17
input when data 3 mode (D3) is in use. • ACC : Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
• MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1] 18
(pin 4).
20
21
124
10 SET MODE
■ ACC set mode (Continued)
SEND Relay Type Lead

Selects the switching relay type for [RELAY] from • Lead : Use mechanical relay.
Lead and MOSFET. (16 V DC/0.5 A max.; default)
• MOS-FET : Use semiconductor type relay.
Select the suitable relay type when connecting a
(250 V/200 mA max.)
non-Icom linear amplifier.
External Meter Output Auto

Selects the desired item for an external meter indi- • Auto : Outputs the receiving signal strength level
cation. during receive, and outputs the selected
level (selected with [METER]), during
transmit. (default)
• S : Outputs the receiving signal strength level
during receive.
• Po : Outputs the transmitting power level dur-
ing transmit.
• SWR : Outputs the VSWR level during transmit.
• ALC : Outputs the ALC level during transmit.
• COMP : O utputs the compression level during
transmit.
• Vd : Outputs the drain terminal voltage of the
final amplifier MOSFETs.
• Id : O utputs the drain current of the final
amplifier MOSFETs.
External Meter Level 50%

Sets the output level for an external meter indication
with in 0% to 100% range in 1% steps.
• Approx. 2.5 V at 50% (default) setting for full-scale indi-
cation. (4.7 kø impedance)
REF Adjust 50 % (Example)

Adjusts the internal reference signal frequency
within 0% to 100% range in 1% steps during fre-
quency calibration.
OTE: Default setting is different for each trans-
N
ceiver.
125
SET MODE 10
■ Display set mode

Bright (LCD) 50%
Adjusts the LCD unit brightness from 0% (dark) to NOTE: When you set the LCD brightness to 0%,
100% (bright) range in 1% steps. (default: 50%) nothing may appear on the screen.
Adjust the LCD brightness until some indicators ap-
pear on the screen, then set it to your desired level.
Backlight (Switches) 80
Adjusts the switch indicators brightness from 1
(dark) to 100 (bright) range in 1 steps. (default: 80)
1
Display Type A
Selects the desired display type from A (Black back)
2
and B (Blue back). (default: A)
See p. 146 for details.
3
4
Display Font Basic
Selects the desired font for frequency readout from 5
Basic, Italic and Round. (default: Basic)
See p. 146 for details. 6
7
Meter Response MID
Set meter needle response from SLOW, MID and 8
FAST. (default: MID)
This setting is effective for the standard and edge- 9
wise meter type selections only.
10
Meter Type (Normal Screen) Standard
Selects the desired S/RF meter type during normal
11
screen display from Standard, Edgewise and Bar.
(default: Standard)
12
13
Meter Type (Wide Screen) Bar
Selects the desired S/RF meter type during wide 14
screen or mini scope display from Edgewise and
Bar. (default: Bar) 15
Meter Peak Hold (Bar) ON
16
Turns the meter peak hold function ON or OFF.
(default: ON)
17
This function is used for the bar meter only. 18
Memory Name ON 19
Sets the memory name display, during memory • OFF : No memory name is displayed even a mem-
mode operation, ON or OFF. (default: ON) ory name is programmed. 20
• ON : T he programmed memory name is dis-
played above the frequency display. 21
126
10 SET MODE
■ Display set mode (Continued)
APF−Width Popup (APF OFF➔ON) ON

Selects the pop-up display for the APF filter width
from ON or OFF. (default: ON)
MN−Q Popup (MN OFF➔ON) ON

Enables the pop-up display capability when the
notch filter width is changed from ON to OFF.
(default: ON)
Screen Saver Function 60min

Turns the screen saver function ON (15, 30 or 60
minutes) and OFF. (default: 60 min.)
The screen saver will activate when no operation is
performed for the selected time period to protect the
LCD from the “burn-in” effect.
Screen Saver Type Bound

Selects the screen saver type from “Bound,”
“Rotation” and “Twist.” (default: Bound)
The screen saver pattern can be displayed for your
reference while pushing and holding [PREVIEW] (F-
5).
Opening Message ON
Turns the opening message screen display capabil-
ity ON or OFF. (default: ON)
My Call
Sets the introductory text, up to 10-character long, z Push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the name edit condi-
displayed in the opening screen. tion.
Usually, you set your call sign for the opening • The cursor under the 1st character blinks.
screen. x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7)
Capital letters, numerals, some symbols (– / . @) to select the character group, then rotate the main
and spaces can be used. dial to select the character.
• Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numerals
and symbols.
When a PC keyboard is connected to the [USB]
connector on the front panel, the call sign can also • Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character.
be edited from the keyboard. • Push [SPACE] (F-4) to input a space.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the name.
127
SET MODE 10
■ Others set mode

Calibration Marker OFF
This item is used for a simple frequency check of the • OFF : Calibration marker OFF
transceiver. (default: OFF) • ON : Calibration marker ON
See p. 147 for calibration procedure.
OTE: Turn the calibration marker OFF after
N
checking the frequency of the transceiver.
Beep (Confirmation) ON
A beep sounds each time a switch is pushed to con- • OFF : Confirmation beep OFF
firm it. This function can be turned OFF for silent • ON : Confirmation beep ON 1
operation. (default: ON)
2
mode. (p. 123)
3
Beep (Band Edge) ON (Default) 4
When you tune into or out of an amateur band’s • OFF : Band edge beep is OFF
frequency range, a beep sounds. This functions • ON (Default) : When you tune into or out of the 5
independently of the confirmation beep setting (as default amateur band’s frequency
described above). range, a beep sounds. (default) 6
• ON (User) : When you tune outside of, or back into
mode. (p. 123)
a user programmed amateur band’s 7
frequency range, a beep sounds.
When “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit” is • ON (User) & TX Limit 8
selected, [BAND] appears in the display above the : When you tune outside of, or back into
function switch (F-5). Up to 30 band edge frequen-
cies can be programmed in band edge screen. (See
a user programmed amateur band’s 9
frequency range, a beep sounds.
the page 31 for programming details.) Transmission is also inhibited outside
the programmed band.
10
11
Beep Sound 1000Hz
Sets the desired beep frequency within 500 to 12
2000 Hz in 10 Hz steps. (default: 1000 Hz)
13
RF/SQL Control RF+SQL 14
The [RF/SQL] control can be set as the RF/squelch • AUTO : [RF/SQL] control as RF gain control
control (default), the squelch control only (RF gain in SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch 15
is fixed at maximum) or ‘Auto’ (RF gain control in control in AM and FM
SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch control in AM • SQL : [RF/SQL] control as squelch control 16
and FM). • RF+SQL : [RF/SQL] control as RF/squelch control
See pgs. 2, 33 for details.
(default) 17
Quick Dualwatch ON
18
When this item is set to ON, pushing and holding • OFF : Quick dualwatch OFF 19
[DUALWATCH] for 1 sec. sets the sub readout fre- • ON : Quick dualwatch ON
quency to the main readout frequency, and activates 20
dualwatch operation. (default: ON)

21
128
10 SET MODE
■ Others set mode (Continued)
Quick SPLIT ON
When this item is set to ON, pushing and holding • OFF : Quick split OFF
[SPLIT] for 1 sec. sets the unselected VFO’s readout • ON : Quick split ON
frequency and operating mode to the selected VFO’s
readout, and activates split operation. (default: ON)
See p. 89 for details.
FM SPLIT Offset (HF) –0.100MHz

Sets the offset (difference between transmit and
receive frequencies) for the quick split function. This
setting is used for HF bands in the FM mode only and
is used to input the repeater offset for an HF band.
The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 to
+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.100 MHz)
FM SPLIT Offset (50M) –0.500MHz

Sets the offset (difference between transmit and
receive frequencies) for the quick split function. This
setting is used for 50 MHz band FM mode only, and is
used to input the repeater offset for the 50 MHz band.
The offset frequency can be set from –9.999 to
+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: –0.500 MHz)
SPLIT LOCK OFF

When this item is ON, the main dial can be used to • OFF : Split lock OFF
adjust the transmit frequency while pushing [XFC], • ON : Split lock ON
even while the lock function is activated.
(default: OFF)
See pgs. 88, 89 for split frequency operation details.
Tuner (Auto Start) OFF

The internal antenna tuner has an automatic start • OFF : T he tuner remains OFF even when the
capability, which starts tuning if the SWR is high. SWR is high.
(default: OFF) • ON : Automatic tune starts even when the tuner
is turned OFF during HF bands operation.
Tuner (PTT Start) OFF

Tuning of the internal/external antenna tuner • OFF : Tuning star ts only when [TUNER] is
can be automatically started at the moment the pushed.
[PTT] is pushed after the operating frequency is • ON : ( Internal antenna tuner) Tuning starts
changed (more than 1% from last-tuned frequency). when [PTT] is pushed on a new frequency
(default: OFF) (more than 1% from last-tuned frequency) if
the internal antenna tuner is ON.
(External antenna tuner) Tuning always
starts when [PTT] is pushed on a new
frequency (more than 1%) regardless of the
external antenna tuner ON/OFF.
129
SET MODE 10
Tuner Preset Memory Clear

The preset memory* of the selected antenna can be • ANT1 Push [CLR] : T he preset memory of the
cleared with pushing [CLR] (F-5). antenna that is connected to
* The variable capacitor settings are memorized as [ANT 1] is cleared after push-
a preset point for each frequency range (100 kHz ing [CLR] (F-5).
steps) after the tuner matches an antenna. • ANT2 Push [CLR] : T he preset memory of the
antenna that is connected to
[ANT 2] is cleared after push-
ing [CLR] (F-5).
[ANT] Switch Auto

1
You can set the antenna connector selection to • OFF : Antenna switch is not activated and does 2
automatic, manual or non-selection (when using 1 not function. The [ANT1] connector is
antenna only). (default: Auto) always selected. 3
• Manual : Antenna switch is activated and manually
selects an antenna.
• Auto : A ntenna switch is activated and the
4
band memory memorizes the selected
antenna. See p. 112 for details.
5
6
Transverter Function Auto
Selects the transverter operation condition from • Auto : The transceiver turns into transverter oper- 7
Auto and ON. (default: Auto) ation condition when 2 to 13.8 V DC is
applied to [ACC2] pin 6. 8
• ON : Turn the transverter operation ON.
9
Transverter Offset 16.000MHz (14.100.0➔30.100.0) 10
Sets the desired offset frequency for the trans-
verter operation within 0.000 to 99.999 MHz in 1 kHz 11
steps. (default: 16.000 MHz)
12
RTTY Mark Frequency 2125 13
Selects the RTTY mark frequency. RTTY mark
frequency is switched between 1275, 1615 and 14
2125 Hz. (default: 2125 Hz)
2125 Hz is automatically selected when the internal 15
RTTY decoder is used.
16
RTTY Shift Width 170 17
Selects the RTTY shift width. There are 3 selectable
values: 170, 200 and 425 Hz. (default: 170 Hz) 18
170 Hz is automatically selected when the internal
RTTY decoder is used. 19
☞ Continued on the next page. 20
21
130
10 SET MODE
RTTY Keying Polarity Normal

Selects the RTTY keying polarity. Normal or reverse • Normal : Key open/close = Mark/Space
keying polarity can be selected. (default: Normal) • Reverse : Key open/close = Space/Mark
When reverse polarity is selected, Mark and Space
are reversed.
PSK Tone Frequency 1500

Selects the desired PSK tone frequency for the PSK
reception between 1000, 1500 and 2000 Hz.
(default: 1500 Hz)
SPEECH Language English

Selects the speech language from English and
Japanese. (default: English)
SPEECH Speed HIGH

Selects the speech speed from HIGH (faster) and
LOW (slower). (default: HIGH)
SPEECH S-Level ON
The IC-7600 speech processor can announce • OFF : Signal level is not announced. (Operating
frequency, mode and signal level. Signal level frequency and mode are announced.)
announcement can be deactivated if desired. • ON : Signal level, operating frequency and mode
(default: ON) is announced.
When “OFF” is selected, the signal level is not
announced.
SPEECH [MODE] Switch OFF

Selects the operating mode speech capability when • OFF : Operating mode speech capability OFF
a mode switch is pushed; ON or OFF. (default: OFF) • ON : Operating mode speech capability ON
T he selected operating mode is verbally
announced when a mode switch is pushed.
[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch SPEECH/LOCK

Selects the [SPEECH/LOCK] switch action. • SPEECH/LOCK : ( Push) The voice synthesizer
(default: SPEECH/LOCK) function is activated.
(Push and hold) The dial lock
function is turned ON or OFF.
• LOCK/SPEECH : ( Push) The dial lock function is
turned ON or OFF.
(Push and hold) The voice syn-
thesizer function is activated.
131
SET MODE 10
Memopad Numbers 5
Sets the number of memo pad channels available.
5 or 10 memo pads can be selected. (default: 5)
MAIN DIAL Auto TS HIGH

Sets the auto tuning step function for the main dial. • HIGH : A pprox. 5 times faster when the tun-
When rapidly rotating the main dial, the tuning step ing step is set to 1 kHz or smaller steps;
automatically changes several times as selected. approx. 2 times faster when the tuning
step is set to 5 kHz or larger steps.
There are 2 type of auto tuning steps: HIGH
(Fastest) and LOW (Faster). (default: HIGH)
• LOW : Approx. 2 times faster 1
• OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF.
2
MIC Up/Down Speed HIGH 3
Sets the rate at which frequencies are scanned • LOW : Low speed (25 tuning steps/sec.)
when the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches are • HIGH : High speed (default; 50 tuning steps/sec.) 4
pushed and held. HIGH or LOW can be selected.
5
Quick RIT/∂TX Clear OFF 6
Selects the RIT/∂TX frequency clearing instruction • OFF : C lears the RIT/∂TX frequency when [CLEAR]
with [CLEAR]. (default: OFF) is pushed and held for 1 sec. 7
• ON : Clears the RIT/∂TX frequency when [CLEAR]
is pushed momentarily. 8
[NOTCH] Switch (SSB) Auto/Manual 9
Selects notch functions for the SSB mode operation
from Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.
• Auto
• Manual
: Only the auto notch can be used.
: Only the manual notch can be used.
10
(default: Auto/Manual) • Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can
be used. (default)
11
12
[NOTCH] Switch (AM) Auto/Manual
Selects notch functions for the AM mode operation • Auto : Only the auto notch can be used. 13
from Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual. • Manual : Only the manual notch can be used.
(default: Auto/Manual) • Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can 14
be used.
15
SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning OFF 16
Selects the displayed frequency shift function from • OFF : The displayed frequency does not shift.
ON and OFF. (default: OFF) • ON : T he displayed frequency shifts when the 17
operating mode is changed between SSB
When this function is activated, the audio pitch or
tones of the received signal will remain the same
and CW. 18
even when the operating mode is changed between
SSB and CW. 19
The amount of frequency shift may differ accord-
ing to the CW pitch setting.
20
21
132
10 SET MODE
CW Normal Side LSB

Selects the sideband used to receive CW in the CW
normal mode from LSB and USB. (default: LSB)
APF Type SOFT

Select audio filter shape for APF between SOFT and • SHARP : The Sharp filter shape rejects interfering
SHARP. (default: SOFT) signals more aggressively.
• SOFT : The Soft filter shape makes distinguish-
ing noise and signals easier. The audio
filter width is related to the CW pitch set-
ting.
External Keypad (VOICE) OFF

Sets the external keypad for voice message trans- • OFF : The external keypad does not function.
mission capability ON or OFF. (default: OFF) • ON : In the phone mode, pushing one of external
keypad switches transmits the desired voice
See page 18 for the equivalent circuit of an external
message contents.
keypad and connection.
External Keypad (KEYER) OFF

Sets the external keypad for keyer memory trans- • OFF : The external keypad does not function.
mission capability ON or OFF. (default: OFF) • ON : In the CW mode, pushing one of external
keypad switches transmits the desired keyer
memory contents.
keypad and connection.
External Keypad (RTTY) OFF

Sets the external keypad for RTTY memory trans- • OFF : The external keypad does not function.
mission capability ON or OFF. (default: OFF) • ON : In the RTTY mode, and while the RTTY
decode screen is active, pushing one of
NOTE: Only RTTY memory channels RT1, RT2,
the external keypad switches transmits the
RT3 and RT4 can be transmitted using with the
desired RTTY memory contents.
external keypad.
keypad and connection details.
External Keypad (PSK) OFF

Sets the external keypad for PSK memory transmis- • OFF : The external keypad does not function.
sion capability ON or OFF. (default: OFF) • ON : In the PSK mode, and while the PSK
decode screen is active, pushing one of
NOTE: Only PSK memory channels PT1, PT2,
the external keypad switches transmits the
PT3 and PT4 can be transmitted using with the
desired PSK memory contents.
external keypad.
keypad and connection details.
133
SET MODE 10
Keyboard [F1]–[F4] (VOICE) OFF

Sets the voice message transmission capability ON • OFF : [F1] to [F4] keys do not function.
or OFF when one of the [F1] to [F4] keys of the key- • ON : Pushing one of the [F1] to [F4] keys trans-
board that is connected to the [USB] (A) connector mits the desired voice message contents
on the front panel is pushed. (default: OFF) during a phone mode operation.
Keyboard [F1]–[F4] (KEYER) OFF

Sets the keyer memory transmission capability ON • OFF : [F1] to [F4] keys do not function.
or OFF when one of the [F1] to [F4] key of the key- • ON : Pushing one of the [F1] to [F4] keys trans-
board that is connected to the [USB] (A) connector mits the desired keyer memory contents 1
on the front panel is pushed. (default: OFF) during the CW mode operation.
And while pushing the [SHIFT] key, push 2
[F1] to [F4] key to repeatedly transmit the
desired keyer memory contents. 3
CI–V Baud Rate Auto
4
Sets the CI-V data transfer between 300, 1200, 5
4800, 9600, 19200 bps and “Auto.”
(default: Auto) 6
When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automati-
cally set, according to the data rate of the connected 7
controller.
8
CI–V Address 7Ah 9
To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has
its own Icom standard address in hexadecimal code. 10
The IC-7600’s address is 7Ah.
When 2 or more IC-7600’s are connected to an 11
optional CT-17 ci-v level converter, rotate the
main dial to select a different address for each IC- 12
7600; the range is 01h to 7Fh.
13
CI–V Transceive ON 14
Transceive operation is possible with the IC-7600 • OFF : Transceive operation OFF
connected to other Icom HF transceivers or receivers. • ON : Transceive operation ON 15
(default: ON) Changing the frequency, operating mode,
etc. on the IC-7600 automatically changes 16
those of other connected transceivers (or
receivers) and vice versa. 17
USB Serial Function CI-V 18
Selects the [USB] connector output data format
between CI-V and Decode. (default: CI-V)
• CI-V : Outputs data in CI-V format.
• Decode : Outputs decoded contents in ASCII code
19
format.
20
21
134
10 SET MODE
Decode Baud Rate 9600

Selects the data transmission speed (Baud rate)
when “Decode” is selected in “USB Serial Function”;
settings are 300, 1200, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps.
(default: 9600)
Keyboard Type English

Selects the connected keyboard type between
English, Japanese, United Kingdom, French, French
(Canadian), German, Portuguese, Portuguese
(Brazilian), Spanish, Spanish (Latin American) and
Italian. (default: English)
Keyboard Repeat Delay 250ms

Sets the time period for delay between 100 to
1000 msec. in 50 msec. steps. (default: 250 msec.)
When a keyboard key is pushed and held for the set
period, the character is input continuously.
Keyboard Repeat Rate 10.9cps

Sets the repeating rate for the keyboard within 2.0 to • Available repeating rate
30.0 cps. (default: 10.9 cps) 2.0, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7, 3.0, 3.3, 3.7, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6,
*cps=character per second 5.0, 5.5, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, 8.0, 8.6, 9.2, 10.0, 10.9,
12.0, 13.3, 15.0, 16.0, 17.1, 18.5, 20.0, 21.8, 24.0,
When a keyboard key is pushed and held, the char-
26.7, 30.0
acter is repeatedly input with the set speed.
135
SET MODE 10
■ USB-Memory set menu

D USB-Memory set screen arrangement
• USB-Memory set menu
The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom.
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
• Setting load screen (p. 137) • Firmware update (p. 164) 1

2
3
4
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-3
Push and hold for 1 sec.
• Load option set mode (p. 138) • Format menu (p. 143) 5
6
7
F-4 8
9
• Setting save screen (p. 139) • Unmount USB-Memory (p. 142)
10
11
F-2
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-5

12
Push and hold
for 1 sec.
13
• Save option set mode (p. 140)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
136
10 SET MODE
■ File loading
By loading the saved setting file from the USB-
Memory, you can easily set up another IC-7600 or
apply the several operators settings to one IC-7600.
q During the set mode menu screen display, push

LOAD/OPT USB [USB] (F-6) to select the USB set menu screen.
F-4 F-6 w Push [LOAD] (F-1) to select setting load screen.
e Push and hold [LOAD/OPT] (F-4) for 1 sec. to
select the load option set mode, then rotate the
main dial to set the desired loading conditions, if
desired.
• See page 138 for details.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to set.
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial setting file.
LOAD OK
y Push [LOAD/OPT] (F-4).
• Confirmation screen appears.
u Push [OK] (F-5) to starts loading.
• After the loading is completed, the message dialog,
“Reboot the IC-7600,” appears.
i Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make
the setting effective.
137
SET MODE 10
D Load option set mode
LOAD Contents Select

Selects file load condition from All and Select. • All : Loads and sets the all following contents.
(default: Select) • Select : Loads and sets the selected contents only.
ANT Memory NO
Selects the antenna memory setting loading condi- • YES : Loads and sets the antenna memory.
tion from YES or NO. (default: NO) • NO : Use the original antenna memory setting. 1
2
REF Adjust NO
Selects the reference signal setting load condition • YES : Loads and sets the reference signal setting. 3
from YES or NO. (default: NO) • NO : Use the original reference signal setting.
4
CI–V Address NO 5
Selects the CI-V address setting load condition from • YES : Loads and sets the CI-V address setting.
YES or NO. (default: NO). • NO : Use the original CI-V address setting. 6
7
Other Memory & Settings YES
This setting is fixed “YES.” • YES : Loads and sets the memory channel con- 8
tents and other settings.
9
Voice TX Memory YES 10
Selects the voice TX message load condition from • YES : Loads and sets the voice TX message.
YES or NO. (default: YES) • NO : Use the original voice TX message. 11
12
Voice RX Memory NO
Selects the voice RX message load condition from • YES : Loads and sets the voice RX message.
13
YES or NO. (default: NO) • NO : Use the original voice RX message.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
138
10 SET MODE
■ File saving
123 DEL SPACE USB
Memory channel contents, set mode settings, etc.
Symbol ABC F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-6
can be saved into the USB-Memory for backup.
q D uring the set mode menu screen display, push

[USB] (F-6) to select the USB Memory set menu screen.
w Push [SAVE] (F-2) to select setting save screen.
e Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name:
dition.
F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial • Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the
DIR/FILE SAVE EDIT file name, if necessary.
x Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7)
to select the character group, then rotate the
– ( ) { } _ – @ can be selected.
• Push [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push [≈]
(F-2) to move the cursor right, push [DEL] (F-3)
F-1 F-2 F-4 F-5 to delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to
DEF SAVE/OPT insert a space.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.
OK
• Save option
MAKE REN DEL F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5
select the save option set mode.
x Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the item,
then rotate the main dial to select the desired
setting. (see p. 140 for details)
default setting.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous dis-
play.
• Saving location
z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder in the
USB-Memory.
same directory.
• Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder.
the folder.
ing a new folder. (Edit the name with the same
name.
t Push [OK] (F-5) to save.
• After saving is completed, automatically return to USB-
Memory set menu.
When a PC keyboard is connected to the [USB] connec-

tor on the front panel, the file name can also be edited
from the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is required.
139
SET MODE 10
D Save option set mode
SAVE Contents All

Selects the file save option from All or Select. • All : Saves all the following contents.
(default: All) • Select : Saves the selected contents only.
Memory & Settings YES

This setting is fixed “YES.” • YES : Saves memory channel contents and set-
tings of set modes. 1
2
Voice TX Memory YES
Selects the voice TX message save option YES or • YES : Saves the voice TX message. 3
NO. (default: YES) • NO : Does not save.
4
Voice RX Memory NO 5
Selects the voice RX message save option YES or • YES : Saves the voice RX message.
NO. (default: NO) • NO : Does not save. 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
140
10 SET MODE
■ Changing a file name

The file name, saved in the USB-Memory, can be re-
named from the transceiver as desired.
123 q D uring the setting save screen display, push

Symbol REN ABC Keypad [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select the tree view screen.
• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired folder.
• “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are avail-
able as the default.
• After the folder is selected, push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4)
for 1 sec. to display content folder(s), if available.
w Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select the file list screen.
file.
F-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET Main dial r Push [REN] (MF5) momentarily to select the file
DIR/FILE
name edit mode.
t Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123]/[Symbol] (MF7) to
select the character group, then rotate the main
dial to select the character.
• [ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to
9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ’ ` ^ – ( ) { } _
– @ can be selected.
• Push [Ω] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push [≈] (F-2)
to move the cursor right, push [DEL] (F-3) to delete a
character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to insert a space.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to store the file name.
When a PC keyboard is connected to the [USB] con-

nector on the front panel, the file name can also be
edited from the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is
required.
141
SET MODE 10
■ Deleting a file
RECOMMENDATION! Deleting the setting file is
irreversible. Confirm the contents before deleting a
setting file!
q D uring the setting save screen display, push

DEL
[DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select the tree view screen.
• Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired folder.
• “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are avail-
able as the default.
• After the folder is selected, push and hold [Ω ≈] (F-4)
for 1 sec. to display content folder(s), if available.
w Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select file list screen.
1
F-1 F-2 F-3 F-5 file to be deleted.
r Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec.
2
DIR/FILE OK
t Push [OK] (F-5) to delete. 3
• After the deleting, return to setting save screen auto-
matically. 4
5
6
7
8
9
■ Unmounting USB-Memory
10
CAUTION: When removing the USB-Memory,
unmount operation is recommended. If you do not
unmount the memory, data on the USB-memory
11
may be corrupted.
12
q During the USB Memory set menu screen display,
push and hold [UNMOUNT] (F-5) for 1 sec.
13
F-5 • A confirmation screen appears.
UNMOUNT w Push [OK] (F-5) to unmount the USB-Memory. 14
OK e After the indicator above [USB] (A) connector goes
off, remove the USB-Memory. 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
142
10 SET MODE
■ Formatting the USB-Memory

Saved data in the USB-Memory can be erased.
IMPORTANT! Formatting erases all saved data on

FAT / OK the USB-Memory. Making a backup file on your PC
F-5 is recommended.
q During the USB Memory set menu screen display,

push and hold [FORMAT] (F-4) for 1 sec.
w Push [FAT] (F-5) or [FAT32] (F-6) to select the for-
mat type, FAT or FAT32, respectively.
e Push [OK] (F-5) to format.
F-4 F-6
• Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel.
FORMAT FAT32 / CANCEL
r Automatically returns to the USB Memory set menu
display.
NOTE: If no USB-Memory is inserted and

[FORMAT] (F-4) is selected as in step q, an error
message appears as below.
143
MAINTENANCE 11
■ Troubleshooting
The following chart is designed to help you correct If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem
problems which are not equipment malfunctions. or solve it through the use of this chart, contact your
nearest Icom Dealer or Service Center.
D Transceiver power
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
Power does not come on • Power cable is improperly connected. • Re-connect the DC power cable correctly. p. 20
when the [POWER] switch is • Fuse is blown. • Check for the cause, then replace the fuse p. 149
pushed. with the spare one.
(Fuses are installed in the DC power cable
1
and the internal PA unit.)
D Transmit and receive 2

No sounds from the speaker. • Volume level is too low. • Rotate the [AF] control clockwise to obtain a p. 34 3
suitable listening level.
• The squelch is closed. • R otate the [RF/SQL] control to 11 o’clock p. 33
position to open the squelch.
4
• The transceiver is in transmit. • Push [TRANSMIT] to receive or check the p. 36
SEND line of an external unit, if connected. 5
Sensitivity is too low, and only • The antenna is not connected properly. • Re-connect to the antenna connector. —
strong signals are audible. • The antenna for another band is selected. • Select an antenna suitable for the operating
frequency.
p. 112 6
• The antenna is not properly tuned. • Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually
tune the antenna.
p. 113
7
• The attenuator is activated. • P ush [ATT] (MF4) several times to select p. 72
“ATT OFF.” 8
Received audio is unclear or • Wrong operating mode is selected. • Select a suitable operating mode. p. 32
distorted. • PBT function is activated. • Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to reset p. 75
the function. 9
• Noise blanker is turned ON when receiving a • Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker OFF. p. 81
strong signal.
• Preamp is activated. • Push [P.AMP] (MF3) once or twice to turn the p. 72
10
function OFF.
• The noise reduction is activated and the [NR] • Set the [NR] control for maximum readability. p. 82 11
control is too far clockwise.
The [ANT] switch does not • The antenna switch has not been activated. • Set the antenna switch in the set mode to p. 130 12
function “Auto” or “Manual.”
Transmitting is impossible. • The operating frequency is not inside a ham • Set the frequency to be in a ham band.
band.
p. 28 13
Output power is too low. • The [RF POWER] control is set too far coun-
terclockwise
• Rotate the [RF POWER] control clockwise. p. 36
14
• The drive gain level is set too high. • Set the drive gain level to a suitable level. p. 37
• The [MIC GAIN] control is set too far counter-
clockwise
• Set the [MIC GAIN] control to a suitable posi-
tion.
p. 36 15
• The antenna for another band is selected. • Select an antenna suitable for the operating
frequency.
p. 112
16
• The antenna is not properly tuned. • Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually p. 113
tune the antenna. 17
No contact can be made with • RIT or ∂TX function is activated. • Push [RIT] or [∂TX] to turn the function OFF. pgs. 73,
another station.
• Split frequency function and/or dualwatch are/ • Push [SPLIT] and/or [DUALWATCH] to turn
87
pgs. 79, 18
is activated. the function OFF. 88
Transmit signal is unclear or • The [MIC GAIN] control is set too far clock- • Set the [MIC GAIN] control to a suitable posi- p. 37 19
distorted. wise. tion.
• The speech compressor function is activated. • Push [COMP] (MF7) to turn the function OFF. p. 86
Repeater cannot be accessed. • Split frequency function is not activated. • Push [SPLIT] to to turn the function ON p. 88
20
• P rogrammed subaudible tone frequency is • Reset the frequency using the set mode.
wrong.
p. 28
21
144
11 MAINTENANCE
D Scanning
Programmed scan does not • Squelch is open. • S et the [RF/SQL] control to the threshold p. 33
stop. point.
Programmed scan does not • The same frequencies have been programmed • Program different frequencies in scan edge p. 101
start. in scan edge memory channels P1 and P2. memory channel P1 and P2.
Memory scan does not start. • 2 or more memory channels have not been • Program more than 2 memory channels. p. 101
programmed.
Select memory scan does not • 2 or more memory channels have not been • Designate more than 2 memory channels as p. 110
start. designated as select channels. select channels for the scan.
D Display
The displayed frequency does • The dial lock function is activated. • Push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to p. 82
not change properly. turn the function OFF.
• A set mode screen is selected. • Push [EXIT/SET] several times to exit the set p. 118
mode screen.
• The internal CPU has malfunctioned. • Reset the CPU. p. 149
The screen saver displays the • The screen saver function is activated. • Operate the transceiver. —
IC-7600 with a “bound,” “rotat- • Set the screen saver function in the set mode p. 127
ing” or “twisting” configuration. to “OFF.”
D Format USB-Memory
Format error appears when • The inserted USB-Memory capacity is smaller • Insert a USB-Memory larger than 64 MB, or p. 143
formatting in FAT32 than 64 MB. select the FAT format.
Format error appears when • The inserted USB-Memory capacity is larger • Insert a USB-Memory smaller than 2 GB, or p. 143
formatting in FAT than 2 GB. select the FAT32 format.
■ Main dial brake adjustment

he tension of the main dial may be adjusted to suit
T
your preference.
The brake adjustment is located on the bottom side of
the front panel. See the figure at right.
Slide the brake adjustment to a comfortable tension
level while turning the dial continuously and evenly in Main dial
one direction.
Brake
adjustment
Light
Heavy
145
MAINTENANCE 11
■ SWR reading
The SWR meter displays the SWR over the transmis- TRANSMIT TUNER METER
sion line in all modes.
q Push [TUNER] to turn the antenna tuner OFF.

w Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec. to display
multi-function meter.
e P ush [RTTY/PSK] once or twice to select the
RTTY mode.
r Push [TRANSMIT].
[RF POWER] RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET
t Rotate [RF POWER] clockwise past the 12 o’clock
position for more than 30 W output power.
y Read the SWR on the SWR meter gage. 1
u Push [EXIT/SET] to close multi-function meter.
2
The built-in antenna tuner matches the transmitter to
the antenna when the SWR is lower than 3 : 1. Better than 1.5:1 3
4
5
6
7
■ Screen type and font selections
8
2 types of screen images and 3 types of frequency
readout display fonts are available in the IC-7600. SET
F-6
9
10
screen.
11
e Push [DISP] (F-3) to select the display set mode.
r P ush [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select “Display
12
Type” item when selecting the screen image, select
“Display Font” when selecting the frequency read- F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial
13
out display font.
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired screen
DISP DEF
14
• Screen image example—
image or font.
• Screen image is selectable from A (Black back) and B Display Type: B, Display Font: Italic 15
(Blue back).
• Basic, Italic and Round are available for the frequency 16
readout font.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit from the display set 17
mode.
18
19
20
21
146
11 MAINTENANCE
■ Frequency calibration (approximate)

A very accurate frequency counter is required to cal-
ibrate the frequency of the transceiver. However, a
rough check may be performed by receiving radio
station WWV, WWVH, or other standard frequency
signals.
C AUTION: The IC-7600 has been thoroughly

adjusted and tested at the factory before being
shipped. You should not have to re-calibrate it.
OTHERS SET
q Push [SSB] to select the USB mode. F-5 F-6 PBT-CLR
w Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the
PBT setting and make sure that the RIT/∂TX func-
tion is not activated.
e Set the frequency to the standard frequency station
minus 1 kHz.
• When receiving WWV or WWVH (at 15.00000 MHz) as
a standard frequency, set the operating frequency for
14.99900 MHz.
F-1 SSB F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial
• Other standard frequencies can be used.
ACC /
r Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi-
t Push [SET] (F-6) to select the set mode menu
screen.
y Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to select the Others set • Calibration marker item
mode.
u P ush [Y ] (F-1) several times to select the
“Calibration Marker” item.
i Rotate the main dial clockwise to turn the calibra-
tion marker ON.
o Push [EXIT/SET] once to return to the set mode
menu screen.
!0 P ush [ACC] (F-2) to select the accessory set
mode.
!1 Push [Z] (F-2) several times to select the “REF
Adjust” item. • REF Adjust item
!2 Rotate the main dial to adjust for a zero beat with
the received standard signal as shown at right.
• Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the same
frequency, resulting in a single tone being emitted.
!3 Turn the calibration marker OFF in the Others set
mode.
!4 Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the set mode.
147
MAINTENANCE 11
■ Opening the transceiver’s case

Follow the case opening procedures shown here
when you want to replace the clock backup battery or
internal fuse.
AUTION: Turn the power OFF and disconnect

C
the DC power cable from the transceiver before
performing any work on the transceiver. Otherwise,
there is danger of electric shock and/or equipment
damage. Carrying handle
q Remove the two screws from the carrying handle-

and remove the handle from the transceiver. 1
w Remove the 6 screws from the top of the trans- Top cover
ceiver and the 4 screws from the sides, then lift up 2
the top cover.
e Turn the transceiver upside-down.
PA shielding
3
CAUTION: NEVER HOLD THE MAIN DIAL OR plate
ANY OTHER KNOBS when the transceiver is 4
being turned upside down. This may damage
them, or cause you to drop the transceiver. 5
r Remove the 6 screws from the bottom, and then lift Bottom cover
off the bottom cover. 6
✔ About the leg pads 7
To detach the leg pads from the right side panel of
the top/bottom cover, push them from the inner side 8
of each cover after steps q to r as above.
9
10
■ Clock backup battery replacement
The IC-7600 has a lithium backup battery (CR2032)
11
inside for clock and timer functions. The usual life of
the backup battery is approximately 2 years.
12
When the backup battery is discharged, the trans-
ceiver transmits and receives normally but cannot
13
retain the current time.
14
CAUTION: Turn the power OFF and disconnect
the DC power cable from the transceiver before 15
removing the transceiver’s cover.
16
q Remove the bottom cover as shown above.
w Replace the clock backup battery, located on the 17
front panel as illustrated to the right.
• Make sure the battery polarity is correct. 18
e Return the bottom cover to the original position.
r Set the date and time in the time set mode.
(p. 116)
19
For customers in California (U.S.A.)
20
The IC-7600 uses a Coin Lithium Battery which
contains Perchlorate Material—special handling 21
may apply.
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
148
11 MAINTENANCE
■ Fuse replacement
If a fuse blows, or the transceiver stops functioning, The IC-7600 has two fuse types installed for trans-
find the source of the problem, and repair it. Then ceiver protection.
replace the damaged fuse with a new, adequately • DC power cable fuses ............................... ATC 30 A
rated fuse. • Circuitry fuse ............................................... ATC 5 A
CAUTION: Turn the power OFF and disconnect

the DC power cable from the transceiver before
removing the transceiver’s cover.
D DC power cable fuse replacement

Refer the figure illustrated at right for the DC power
cable fuse replacement.
ATC 30 A fuse
D Circuitry fuse replacement

PA shielding plate
Except for the power amplifier, the 13.8 V DC from
the DC power cable is applied to all units in the IC-
7600, through the circuitry fuse. This fuse is installed
in the PA unit. Speaker cable
q Remove the top cover. (p. 148)

w Remove the 11 screws, then remove the bottom
cover and the PA shielding plate as shown to the
right.
e Replace the circuitry fuse as shown in the diagram
to the right.
r R eplace the PA shielding plate, top cover and
screws to their original position.
ATC 5 A fuse
R WARNING: DO NOT pull the speaker cable
when removing or replacing the PA shielding plate.
Otherwise, a fire, injury or damage the transceiver
may occur.
POWER MW F-INP ENT
■ Resetting the CPU

q First, turn the transceiver power OFF.
w While pushing and holding [F-INP ENT] and [MW],
push [POWER] to turn power ON.
• The internal CPU is reset.
• The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec.
• The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies
when resetting is complete.
e If desired, correct the set mode settings after reset-
ting.
NOTE: Resetting CLEARS all programmed con-

tents in memory channels and returns programmed
values in the set mode to default values.
149
MAINTENANCE 11
■ About protection displays

The IC-7600 has a 2-step protection function to pro-
tect the final power amplifiers.
The protector monitors the power amplifier temper-
ature and activates when the temperature becomes
extremely high.
• Reduced power transmission

Reduces the transmit output power to 50 W.
“LMT” appears beside the TX indicator (p. 14) dur-
ing transmit.
• Transmission inhibit
Deactivates the transmitter. 1
The TX indicator (p. 14) is displayed in gray during
transmit. 2
When the protector is activated, wait until the 3
power amplifier cools down, using the transceiver
in only stand-by or receive mode. 4
NOTE: DO NOT turn the transceiver power OFF
when the protector is ON. If you do, the cooling fan
5
Check the temperature
will not function and it will take longer to cool the
transceiver.
6
The power amplifier temperature can be monitored in 7
the multi-function meter, TEMP gauge.
8
■ Screen saver function 9
The IC-7600 has a screen saver function to protect
the LCD from the “burn-in” effect. 10
q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi- PREVIEW SET 11
function screens. F-5 F-6
w Push [SET] (F-6) to select the set mode menu 12
screen.
e Push [DISP] (F-3) to select the display set mode. 13
r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) several times to select
the “Screen Saver Function” item. 14
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired time
period for the screen saver activation from 15, 30, 15
60 min. and OFF. F-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET Main dial
• Deactivate the screen saver with “OFF” selection.
y Push [Z] (F-2) to select the “Screen Saver Type”
DISP 16
item.
u Rotate the main dial to select the screen saver type
17
from “Bound,” “Rotation” and “Twist.”
• Push and hold [PREVIEW] (F-5) to display the pattern 18
for your reference.
i Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the set mode. 19
NOTE: When the screen saver function is acti- 20
vated, the LCD unit brightness is set to dark (0%),
and the indicator on the [NR] switch blinks.
When “Twist” is selected 21
150
12 CONTROL COMMAND
■ Remote jack (CI-V) information

D CI-V connection example
he transceiver can be connected through an optional
T
CT-17 ci - v level converter to a PC equipped 9−15V DC
with an RS-232C port. The Icom Communications RS-232C
Interface-V (CI-V) controls the transceiver. cable
Up to 4 Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be
connected to the PC. See p. 134 for setting the CI-V PC
condition using the set mode.
ct-17
mini-plug cable
IC-7600
When the transceiver is connected to a PC with the

USB cable (purchased separately), the optional
CT-17 is not required.
D Data format
The CI-V system can be operated using the follow-
ing data formats. Data formats differ according to
command numbers. A data area or sub command is
added for some commands.
Controller to IC-7600 OK message to controller

q w e r t y u
FE FE 7A E0 Cn Sc Data area FD FE FE E0 7A FB FD
(see the data content description)
BCD code data such as
Sub command number
for frequency, memory

(see the command table)
(see the command table)
NG code OK code
(fixed)
Command number
End of message
End of message
default address
default address
default address
default address
number entry
Transceiver’s
Transceiver’s
Controller’s
Controller’s
code (fixed)
code (fixed)
code (fixed)
code (fixed)
Preamble
Preamble
(fixed)
FE FE E0 7A Cn Sc Data area FD FE FE E0 7A FA FD
q w e r t y u
IC-7600 to controller NG message to controller
151
CONTROL COMMAND 12
D Command table
Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description
00 see p. 157 Send frequency data for transceive 10 00 Select 10 Hz (1 Hz) tuning step
01 see p. 157 Operating mode selection for transceive 01 Select 100 Hz tuning step
02 see p. 159 Read band edge frequencies 02 Select 1 kHz tuning step
03 see p. 157 Read operating frequency 03 Select 5 kHz tuning step
04 see p. 157 Read operating mode 04 Select 9 kHz tuning step
05 see p. 157 Set operating frequency 05 Select 10 kHz tuning step
06 see p. 157 Operating mode selection 06 Select 12.5 kHz tuning step
07 Select VFO mode 07 Select 20 kHz tuning step
B0 Exchange main and sub bands 08 Select 25 kHz tuning step
B1 Equalize main and sub bands 11 00 Send/read attenuator OFF
C0 Turn the dualwatch OFF 06 Send/read 6 dB attenuator
C1 Turn the dualwatch ON 12 Send/read 12 dB attenuator
D0 Select main band 18 Send/read 18 dB attenuator
08
D1 Select sub band
Select memory mode
12 0000
0001
Send/read ANT1 selection (RX ANT OFF)
Send/read ANT1 selection (RX ANT ON) 1
0001 to Select memory channel 0100 Send/read ANT2 selection (RX ANT OFF)
0099
0100
(0001=M-CH01, 0099=M-CH99)
Select program scan edge channel P1 13 00
0101 Send/read ANT2 selection (RX ANT ON)
Announce all data with voice synthesizer
2
0101 Select program scan edge channel P2 01 Announce frequency and S-meter level with
09
0A
Memory write
Memory to VFO 02
voice synthesizer
Announce receive mode with voice synthesizer
3
0B Memory clear 14 01 0000 to Send/read [AF] level
0E 00 Scan stop
02
0255
0000 to
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)
Send/read [RF] level
4
01 Programmed/memory scan start
5
02 Programmed scan start 0255 (0000=max. CCW, 0255=11 o'clock)
03 :F scan start 03 0000 to Send/read [SQL] level
12 Fine programmed scan start 0255 (0000=11 o'clock, 0255=max. CW)
13
22
Fine :F scan start
Memory scan start
06 0000 to
0255
Send/read [NR] level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) 6
23 Select memory scan start 07 0000 to Send/read inner [TWIN PBT] position
A1
A2
Select :F scan span ±5 kHz
Select :F scan span ±10 kHz 08
0255
0000 to
(0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW)
Send/read outer [TWIN PBT] position 7
0255 (0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW)
A3 Select :F scan span ±20 kHz
A4
A5
09 0000 to
0255
Send/read CW pitch
(0000=300 Hz, 0128=600 Hz, 0255=900 Hz; 8
5 Hz steps)
A6
A7
Select :F scan span ±1 MHz
0A 0000 to
0255
Send/read [RF POWER] level
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW) 9
B0 Set as non-select channel 0B 0000 to Send/read [MIC GAIN] level
B1 Set as select channel
(The previously set number by CI-V is set after 0C
0255
0000 to
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)
Send/read [KEY SPEED] level
10
turning power ON, or “1” is selected if no selec- 0255 (0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)
01
tion is performed.)
Set as select channel “★1”
0D 0000 to
0255
Send/read [NOTCH] position
11
02 Set as select channel “★2” 0E 0000 to Send/read COMP level
B2
03
00
Set as select channel “★3”
Set “ALL” for select memory scan 0F
0255
0000 to
(0000=0, 0255=10)
Send/read [BK-IN DELAY] position
12
01 Set “★1” for select memory scan 0255 (0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)
02
03
Set “★2” for select memory scan
Set “★3” for select memory scan
10 0000 to
0255
Send/read [BAL] position
13
D0 Set scan resume OFF
D3 Set scan resume ON
12 0000 to
0255
Send/read NB level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) 14
0F 00 Turn the split function OFF 14 0000 to Send/read DRIVE gain
01 Turn the split function ON
15
0255
0000 to
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
Send/read Monitor gain 15
0255 (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
16 0000 to
0255
Send/read VOX gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) 16
17 0000 to Send/read Anti VOX gain
19
0255
0000 to
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
Send/read BRIGHT level 17
0255 (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
15 01 00
01
Read squelch condition (squelch close)
Read squelch condition (squelch open)
18
02 0000 to Read S-meter level
11
0255
0000 to
(0000=S0, 0120=S9, 0241=S9+60 dB)
Read RF power meter
19
0255 (0000=0%, 0143=50%, 0213=100%)
12 0000 to
0255
Read SWR meter
(0000=SWR1.0, 0048=SWR1.5, 0080=SWR2.0)
20
21
13 0000 to Read ALC meter
0255 (0000=0, 0120=Max.)
14 0000 to Read COMP meter
0255 (0000=0 dB, 0130=15 dB, 0241=30 dB)
152
12 CONTROL COMMAND
D Command table (continued)
15 15 0000 to Read VD meter 1A 05 0015 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Bass) level
0255 (0152=10 V, 0181=13 V, 0212=16 V) (00=–5, 10=+5)
16 0000 to Read ID meter 0016 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Treble) level
0255 (0000=0 A, 0097=10 A, 0241=25 A) (00=–5, 10=+5)
16 02 00 Preamp OFF 0017 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Bass) level
01 Preamp 1 ON (00=–5, 10=+5)
02 Preamp 2 ON 0018 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Treble) level
12 00 AGC FAST selection (00=–5, 10=+5)
01 AGC MID selection 0019 see p. 122 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for WIDE
02 AGC SLOW selection 0020 see p. 122 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for MID.
22 00 Noise blanker OFF 0021 see p. 122 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for NARROW
01 Noise blanker ON 0022 0000 to Send/read DRIVE gain
32 00 Audio peak filter OFF 0255 (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
01 Audio peak filter WIDE ON 0023 0000 to Send/read speech level
(320 Hz is selected when SHARP APF is set) 0255 (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
02 Audio peak filter MID ON 0024 0000 to Send/read CW sidetone level
(160 Hz is selected when SHARP APF is set) 0255 (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
03 Audio peak filter NAR ON 0025 00 CW sidetone level limit OFF
(80 Hz is selected when SHARP APF is set) 01 CW sidetone level limit ON
40 00 Noise reduction OFF 0026 0000 to Send/read beep level
01 Noise reduction ON 0255 (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
41 00 Auto notch function OFF 0027 00 Beep level limit OFF
01 Auto notch function ON 01 Beep level limit ON
42 00 Repeater tone OFF 0028 00 Squelch mute effect OFF (squelch is fixed
01 Repeater tone ON open) for audio output from USB-B connector
43 00 Tone squelch OFF 01 Squelch mute effect ON for audio output from
01 Tone squelch ON USB-B connector
44 00 Speech compressor OFF 0029 0000 to Send/read modulation level for audio input to
0255 USB-B connector (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
01 Speech compressor ON
0030 00 [MIC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
45 00 Monitor function OFF
ing DATA OFF
01 Monitor function ON
01 [ACC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
46 00 VOX function OFF ing DATA OFF
01 VOX function ON 02 Both [MIC] and [ACC] selection for MOD
47 00 BK-IN function OFF input connector during DATA OFF
01 Semi BK-IN function ON 03 [USB] selection for MOD input connector dur-
02 Full BK-IN function ON ing DATA OFF
48 00 Manual notch function OFF 0031 00 [MIC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
01 Manual notch function ON ing DATA1
4F 00 Twin peak filter OFF 01 [ACC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
01 Twin peak filter ON ing DATA1
50 00 Dial lock function OFF 02 Both [MIC] and [ACC] selection for MOD
01 Dial lock function ON input connector during DATA1
19 00 Read the transceiver ID 03 [USB] selection for MOD input connector dur-
1A 00 see p. 159 Send/read memory contents ing DATA1
01 see p. 157 Send/read band stacking register contents 0032 00 [MIC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
02 see p. 157 Send/read memory keyer contents ing DATA2
03 00 to 49 Send/read the selected filter width 01 [ACC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
(SSB, CW, PSK: 00=50 Hz, 40=3600 Hz; ing DATA2
RTTY: 00=50 Hz, 31=2700 Hz; 02 Both [MIC] and [ACC] selection for MOD
AM: 00=200 Hz, 49=10 kHz) input connector during DATA2
04 00 to 13 Send/read the selected AGC time constant 03 [USB] selection for MOD input connector dur-
(00=OFF, 01=0.1/0.3 sec., 13=6.0/8.0 sec.) ing DATA2
05 0001 see p. 120 Send/read SSB RX HPF/LPF 0033 00 [MIC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
0002 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Bass) level ing DATA3
(00=–5, 10=+5) 01 [ACC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
0003 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Treble) level ing DATA3
(00=–5, 10=+5) 02 Both [MIC] and [ACC] selection for MOD
0004 see p. 120 Send/read AM RX HPF/LPF input connector during DATA3
0005 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX tone (Bass) level 03 [USB] selection for MOD input connector dur-
(00=–5, 10=+5) ing DATA3
0006 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX Tone (Treble) level 0034 00 Lead selection for SEND relay type
(00=–5, 10=+5) 01 MOS-FET selection for SEND relay type
0007 see p. 120 Send/read FM RX HPF/LPF 0035 00 Auto selection for external meter output
0008 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX tone (Bass) level 01 S (receiving signal strength) selection for ex-
(00=–5, 10=+5) ternal meter output
0009 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX Tone (Treble) level 02 Po (RF power) selection for external meter
(00=–5, 10=+5) selection
0010 see p. 121 Send/read CW RX HPF/LPF 03 SWR selection for external meter output
0011 see p. 121 Send/read RTTY RX HPF/LPF 04 ALC selection for external meter output
0012 see p. 121 Send/read PSK RX HPF/LPF 05 COMP selection for external meter output
0013 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Bass) level 06 Vd selection for external meter output
(00=–5, 10=+5) 07 Id selection for external meter output
0014 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Treble) level 0036 0000 to Send/read external meter output level
(00=–5, 10=+5) 0255 (see p. 125)
153
CONTROL COMMAND 12
1A 05 0037 0000 to Send/read reference frequency 1A 05 0069 00 PTT tune OFF
0255 (0000=0%, 0255=100%) 01 PTT tune ON
0038 0000 to Send/read LCD backlight brightness level 0070 00 Antenna selection OFF
0255 (0000=0% (dark), 0255=100% (bright)) 01 Manual antenna selection
0039 0000 to Send/read key backlight brightness level 02 Auto antenna selection
0255 (0000=1 (dark), 0255=100 (bright)) 0071 00 Transverter functions automatically
0040 00 Display type A selection 01 Transverter function ON
01 Display type B selection 0072 see p. 158 Transverter offset frequency
0041 00 Basic font selection 0073 00 1275 Hz selection for RTTY mark frequency
01 Italic font selection 01 1615 Hz selection for RTTY mark frequency
02 Round font selection 02 2125 Hz selection for RTTY mark frequency
0042 00 SLOW selection for meter response 0074 00 170 Hz selection for RTTY shift width
01 MID selection for meter response 01 200 Hz selection for RTTY shift width
0043
02
00
FAST selection for meter response
Standard meter selection for normal screen 0075
02
00
425 Hz selection for RTTY shift width
RTTY keying with normal polarity 1
indication 01 RTTY keying with reverse polarity
01 Edgewise meter selection for normal screen
indication
0076 00
01
1000 Hz selection for PSK tone frequency
1500 Hz selection for PSK tone frequency
2
02 Bar meter selection for normal screen indica- 02 2000 Hz selection for PSK tone frequency
0044 00
tion
Edgewise meter selection for wide screen
0077 00 English selection for voice synthesizer
speech language
3
indication
01 Japanese selection for voice synthesizer
0045
01
00
Bar meter selection for wide screen indication
Meter peak hold function for Bar meter OFF 0078 00
speech language
Speech speed slow
4
01 Meter peak hold function for Bar meter ON
0046 00
01
Memory name indication OFF
Memory name indication ON
0079
01
00
Speech speed fast
S-meter level announcement OFF 5
01 S-meter announcement ON
0047 00 Audio peak filter width pop-up indication OFF
01 Audio peak filter width pop-up indication ON
0080 00 Operating mode announcement (after push-
ing mode switch) OFF 6
0048 00 Manual notch filter width pop-up indication OFF 01 Operating mode announcement (after push-
0049
01
00
Manual notch filter width pop-up indication ON
Screen saver OFF 0081 00
ing mode switch) ON
[SPEECH/LOCK] key function setting 7
01 15 min. selection for screen saver (Push momentariliy=SPEECH,
02
03
30 min. selection for screen saver
60 min. selection for screen saver 01
Push and hold=LOCK)
[SPEECH/LOCK] key function setting
8
0050 00 Bound selection for screen saver type (Push momentariliy=LOCK,
01
02
Round selection for screen saver type
Twist selection for screen saver type 0082 00
Push and hold=SPEECH)
Number of memo pad channels 5
9
0051 00 Opening screen indication OFF 01 Number of memo pad channels 10
0052
01
see p. 158
Opening screen indication ON
Send/read opening screen contents.
0083 00
01
Auto TS for main dial OFF
Auto TS for main dial ON with LOW
10
11
0053 20000101 Send/read date 02 Auto TS for main dial ON with HIGH
to (20000101=1st Jan. 2000, 0084 00 LOW selection for microphone Up/Down speed
20991231 20991231=31st Dec. 2099) 01 HIGH selection for microphone Up/Down speed
0054 0000 to
2359
Send/read time
(0000=00:00, 2359=23:59)
0085 00
01
Quick RIT/:TX clear OFF
Quick RIT/:TX clear ON 12
0055 00 Clock 2 OFF 0086 00 Auto notch selection for SSB operation
0056
01
see p. 157
Clock 2 ON
Send/read offset time for clock 2
01
02
Manual notch selection for SSB operation
Auto/Manual notch selection for SSB operation
13
0057 see p. 158 Send/read clock 2 name *Up to 3 characters 0087 00 Auto notch selection for AM operation
0058 00
01
Calibration marker OFF
Calibration marker ON
01
02
Manual notch selection for AM operation
Auto/Manual notch selection for AM operation
14
0059 00 Confirmation beep OFF 0088 00 SSB/CW synchronous tuning function OFF
0060
01
00
Confirmation beep ON
Band edge beep OFF 0089
01
00
SSB/CW synchronous tuning function ON
LSB selection for CW normal side set
15
16
01 Band edge beep ON (Beep sounds with a 01 USB selection for CW normal side set
default amateur band) 0090 00 SHARP selection for APF type
02 Band edge beep with user setting ON 01 SOFT selection for APF type
0061
03
0050 to
Band edge beep with user setting/TX limit ON
Send/read beep audio frequency
0091 00 Voice memory transmission OFF with exter-
nal keypad 17
0200 (0050=500 Hz, 0200=2000 Hz) 01 Voice memory transmission ON with external
0062 00
01
Auto selection for [RF/SQL]
SQL selection for [RF/SQL] 0092 00
keypad
Memory keyer transmission OFF with exter-
18
02 RF+SQL selection for [RF/SQL] nal keypad
0063 00
01
Quick dualwatch OFF
Quick dualwatch ON
01 Memory keyer transmission ON with external
keypad
19
0064 00 Quick split function OFF 0093 00 RTTY memory transmission OFF with exter-
0065
01
see p. 158
Quick split function ON
FM split offset frequency setting for HF 01
nal keypad
RTTY memory transmission ON with external
20
0066 see p. 158 FM split offset frequency setting for 50 MHz keypad
0067 00 Split lock function OFF 0094 00 PSK memory transmission OFF with external
keypad
21
01 Split lock function ON
0068 00 Tuner auto start OFF 01 PSK memory transmission ON with external
01 Tuner auto start ON keypad
154
12 CONTROL COMMAND
D Command table (continued)
1A 05 0095 00 Voice memory transmission OFF with [F1]– 1A 05 0113 00 SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in
[F4] on the keyboard ±100 kHz span
01 Voice memory transmission ON with [F1]– 01 MID selection for scope sweep speed in
0096 00 Memory keyer transmission OFF with [F1]– 02 FAST selection for scope sweep speed in
01 Memory keyer transmission ON with [F1]– 0114 00 SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in
0097 00 CI-V transceive OFF 01 MID selection for scope sweep speed in
01 CI-V transceive ON ±250 kHz span
0098 00 CI-V selection for [USB-B] usage 02 FAST selection for scope sweep speed in
01 Decode selection for [USB-B] usage ±250 kHz span
0099 00 300 bps selection for decode speed 0115 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 0.03 to 1.60 MHz
01 1200 bps selection for decode speed band
02 4800 bps selection for decode speed 0116 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 1.60 MHz to
03 9600 bps selection for decode speed 2.00 MHz band
04 19200 bps selection for decode speed 0117 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 2.00 MHz to
0100 00 English keyboard selection 6.00 MHz band
01 Japanese keyboard selection 0118 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 6.00 MHz to
8.00 MHz band
02 United Kingdom keyboard selection
0119 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 8.00 MHz to
03 French keyboard selection
11.00 MHz band
04 French (Canadian) keyboard selection
0120 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 11.00 MHz to
05 German keyboard selection 15.00 MHz band
06 Portuguese keyboard selection 0121 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 15.00 MHz to
07 Portuguese (Brazilian) keyboard selection 20.00 MHz band
08 Spanish keyboard selection 0122 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 20.00 MHz to
09 Spanish (Latin American) keyboard selection 22.00 MHz band
10 Italian keyboard selection 0123 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 22.00 MHz to
0101 0010 to Send/read keyboard repeat delay 26.00 MHz band
0100 (0010=100 msec., 0100=1000 msec.; 0124 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 26.00 MHz to
50 msec. steps) 30.00 MHz band
0102 00 to 31 Send/read keyboard repeat speed 0125 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 30.00 MHz to
(00=2.0 cps, 31=30.0 cps) 45.00 MHz band
0103 00 Scope indication during TX OFF 0126 see p. 158 Scope edge frequencies for 45.00 MHz to
01 Scope indication during TX ON 60.00 MHz band
0104 00 Scope max. hold function OFF 0127 00 Auto monitor function OFF during voice
01 Scope max. hold function ON memory transmission
0105 00 Filter center selection for scope center fre- 01 Auto monitor function ON during voice mem-
quency (center mode only) ory transmission
01 Carrier point center selection for scope cen- 0128 03 to 10 Send/read voice memory short play time
ter frequency (center mode only) (03=3 sec., 10=10 sec.)
02 Carrier point center (Abs. Freq.) selection for 0129 05 to 15 Send/read voice memory normal record time
scope center frequency (center mode only) (05=5 sec., 15=15 sec.)
0106 see p. 158 Send/read waveform color for receiving signal 0130 00 Normal selection for contest number style
0107 see p. 158 Send/read waveform color for max. hold 01 “190→ANO” selection for contest number style
0108 00 SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in 02 “190→ANT” selection for contest number style
±2.5 kHz span 03 “90→NO” selection for contest number style
01 MID selection for scope sweep speed in 04 “90→NT” selection for contest number style
±2.5 kHz span 0131 01 M1 selection for count up trigger channel
02 FAST selection for scope sweep speed in 02 M2 selection for count up trigger channel
±2.5 kHz span 03 M3 selection for count up trigger channel
0109 00 SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in 04 M4 selection for count up trigger channel
±5 kHz span 0132 0001 to Send/read present number
01 MID selection for scope sweep speed in 9999 (0001=1, 9999=9999)
±5 kHz span 0133 01 to 60 Send/read CW keyer repeat time
02 FAST selection for scope sweep speed in (01=1 sec., 60=60 sec.)
±5 kHz span 0134 28 to 45 Send/read CW keyer dot/dash ratio
0110 00 SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in (28=1:1:2.8, 45=1:1:4.5)
±10 kHz span 0135 00 2 msec. selection for rise time of the transmit-
01 MID selection for scope sweep speed in ted CW envelope
±10 kHz span 01 4 msec. selection for rise time of the transmit-
02 FAST selection for scope sweep speed in ted CW envelope
0111 00 SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in ted CW envelope
01 MID selection for scope sweep speed in ted CW envelope
±25 kHz span 04 10 msec. selection for rise time of the trans-
02 FAST selection for scope sweep speed in mitted CW envelope
±25 kHz span 0136 00 Normal selection for paddle polarity
0112 00 SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in 01 Reverse selection for paddle polarity
±50 kHz span
0137 00 Straight selection for keyer type
01 MID selection for scope sweep speed in
01 BUG-KEY selection for keyer type
±50 kHz span
02 ELEC-KEY selection for keyer type
02 FAST selection for scope sweep speed in
±50 kHz span 0138 00 Mic. up/down keyer function OFF
01 Mic. up/down keyer function ON
155
CONTROL COMMAND 12
1A 05 0139 00 RTTY decoder FFT scope averaging function 1A 05 0169 0000 to Send/read NB level
OFF 0255 (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
01 Number 2 selection for RTTY decoder FFT 0170 00 to 09 Send/read NB depth
scope averaging function (00=1, 09=10)
02 Number 3 selection for RTTY decoder FFT 0171 0000 to Send/read NB width
scope averaging function 0255 (0000=1, 0255=100)
03 Number 4 selection for RTTY decoder FFT 0172 0000 to Send/read MONITOR gain
scope averaging function 0255 (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
0140 see p. 158 Set/read FFT scope waveform color set for 06 see p. 158 Send/read DATA mode with filter set
RTTY decoder 07 00 WIDE selection for SSB transmit bandwidth
0141 00 RTTY decode USOS function OFF 01 MID selection for SSB transmit bandwidth
01 RTTY decode USOS function ON 02 NAR selection for SSB transmit bandwidth
0142 00 “CR,LF,CR+LF” selection for RTTY decode 08 00 SHARP selection for DSP filter type
new line code
1
01 SOFT selection for DSP filter type
01 “CR+LF” selection for RTTY decode new line 09 00 3 kHz roofing filter selection
code 01 6 kHz roofing filter selection
2
0143 00 OFF selection for RTTY diddle 02 15 kHz roofing filter selection
01 BLANK selection for RTTY diddle 0A 00 WIDE selection for manual notch width
02 LTRS selection for RTTY diddle 01 MID selection for manual notch width
0144 00
01
RTTY encode USOS function OFF
RTTY encode USOS function ON 1B 00
02 NAR selection for manual notch width
see p. 159 Send/read repeater tone frequency
3
0145 00 RTTY auto CR+LF by keyboard’s [F12] OFF 01 see p. 159 Send/read tone squelch frequency
0146
01
00
RTTY auto CR+LF by keyboard’s [F12] ON
RTTY time stamp OFF
1C 00 00
01
Transceiver's condition (RX)
Transceiver's condition (TX)
4
01 RTTY time stamp ON 01 00 Antenna tuner OFF (through)
0147 00
01
Local time selection for RTTY time stamp
Clock2 selection for RTTY time stamp
01 Antenna tuner ON 5
02 Tuning
0148 00 Frequency stamp for RTTY time stamp OFF
01 Frequency stamp for RTTY time stamp ON
1E 00
01
Read number of available TX frequency band
see p. 159 Read TX band edge frequencies 6
0149 see p. 158 Send/read received text font color for RTTY 02 Read number of user-set TX frequency band
0150 see p. 158

decoder
Send/read transmitted text font color (RTTY)
03 see p. 159 Send/read user-set TX band edge frequencies
7
0151 see p. 158 Send/read time stamp text font color (RTTY)
0152 see p. 158
0153 00
Send/read text font color in TX buffer (RTTY)
PSK decoder FFT scope averaging function 8
OFF
01 Number 2 selection for PSK decoder FFT
scope averaging function 9
02 Number 3 selection for PSK decoder FFT
03
scope averaging function
Number 4 selection for PSK decoder FFT
10
scope averaging function
0154 see p. 158 Set/read FFT scope waveform color set for
PSK decoder
11
0155 00 ±8 Hz selection for PSK AFC function tuning
01
range
±15 Hz selection for PSK AFC function tun-
12
ing range
0156 00 PSK time stamp OFF 13
01 PSK time stamp ON
0157 00
01
Local time selection for PSK time stamp
Clock2 selection for PSK time stamp 14
0158 00 Frequency stamp for PSK time stamp OFF
01
0159 see p. 158
Frequency stamp for PSK time stamp ON
Send/read received text font color for PSK 15
decoder
0160 see p. 158
0161 see p. 158
Send/read transmitted text font color (PSK)
Send/read time stamp text font color (PSK)
16
0162 see p. 158 Send/read text font color in TX buffer (PSK)
0163 00
01
LOW scan speed selection
HIGH scan speed selection
17
18
0164 00 Scan resume OFF
01 Scan resume ON
0165 0000 to Send/read VOX gain
0255
0166 0000 to
(0000=0%, 0255=100%)
Send/read ANTI-VOX gain 19
0255 (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
0167 00 to 20 Send/read VOX delay time
(00=0.0 sec., 20=2.0 sec.) 20
0168 00 VOX voice delay function OFF
01
02
Short selection for VOX voice delay
Mid selection for VOX voice delay
21
03 Long selection for VOX voice delay
156
12 CONTROL COMMAND
D Data content description • Band stacking register

• Operating frequency Command : 1A 01
Command : 00, 03, 05 q w
q w e r t X X X X
X X X X X X X X 0 0
q Frequency band code
Code Freq. band Frequency range (unit: MHz)
100 kHz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
1000 MHz digit: 0

100 Hz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9
1 MHz digit: 0–9
100 MHz digit: 0

10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
01 1.8 1.800000– 1.999999

1 Hz digit: 0–9
02 3.5 3.400000– 4.099999

03 7 6.900000– 7.499999
(Fixed)
(Fixed)
04 10 9.900000–10.499999
05 14 13.900000–14.499999
06 18 17.900000–18.499999
07 21 20.900000–21.499999
08 24 24.400000–25.099999
• Operating mode 09 28 28.000000–29.999999
Command : 01, 04, 06 10 50 50.000000–54.000000
q w 11 GENE Other than above
X X X X
w Register code
Code Registered No.
q Operating mode w Filter setting
01 1 (latest)
00: LSB 05: FM 01: FIL1
02 2
01: USB 07: CW-R 02: FIL2
03 3 (oldest)
02: AM 08: RTTY-R 03: FIL3
03: CW 12: PSK For example, when reading the oldest contents in the
04: RTTY 13: PSK-R 21 MHz band, the code “0703” is used.
Filter setting (w) can be skipped with command 01 When sending the contents, the following code should
and 06. In that case, “FIL1” is selected with command be added after code w.
01 and the default filter setting of the operating mode q, w e−u i, o !0 !1−!3 !4−!6
is selected with command 06, automatically. X X X X X X ... X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
e–u Operating frequency setting

• Memory keyer contents See “• Operating frequency.”
Command : 1A 02 i, o Operating mode setting
X X X X …… X X See “• Operating mode.”
!0 Data mode setting
w–&1: Text data 1 byte data (XX)
q: Channel data !0
01：M1 X X
02：M2
03：M3 0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: TSQL
04：M4 0: OFF, 1: DATA 1, 2: DATA 2, 3: DATA 3
!1–!3 Repeater tone frequency setting

• Character’s code
!4–!6 Tone squelch frequency setting
Character ASCII code Description
See “• Repeater tone/tone squelch setting.”
0–9 30–39 Numerals
A–Z 41–5A Alphabetical characters
space 20 Word space • Clock 2 offset time setting
/ 2F Symbol Command : 1A 05 0056
? 3F Symbol
X X X X XX
, 2C Symbol
. 2E Symbol Shift direction
@ 40 Symbol 00: + (plus)
^ 5E e.g., to send BT, enter ^BT 01: − (minus)
 2A Inserts contest number (can be Offset time
used for 1 channel only) 0000−2400
157
CONTROL COMMAND 12
• Offset frequency setting • Color setting

Command : 1A 05 0065, 0066, 0072 Command : 1A 05 0106, 0107, 0140, 0149, 0150,
q w e r*
0151, 0152, 0154, 0159, 0160,
0161, 0162
X 0 X X 0 X XX
q w e r t y
0 X X X 0 X X X 0 X X X
100 Hz digit: 0 (fixed)
R (Red) G (Green) B (Blue)

10 MHz digit: 0–9†
0000–0255 0000–0255 0000–0255

10 kHz digit: 0–9
1 MHz digit: 0–9

1 kHz digit: 0–9
00=+ direction
01=– direction
Direction: • Bandscope edge frequency setting
Command : 1A 05 0115, 0116, 0117, 0118, 0119, 1
0120, 0121, 0122, 0123, 0124,
*No need to enter for transverter offset frequency setting.
†
Transverter offset only; Fix to ‘0’ for split offset setting.
0125, 0126 2
q w e r t y
X X X X X X X X X X X X 3
• Codes for memory name, opening
message and CLOCK2 name contents 4
100 Hz: 0 (fixed)
100 Hz: 0 (fixed)

5
100 kHz: 0–9
100 kHz: 0–9

To send or read the desired memory name settings,
10 MHz: 0–6
10 MHz: 0–6
10 kHz: 0–9
10 kHz: 0–9
1 MHz: 0–9
1 MHz: 0–9
1 kHz: 0–9
1 kHz: 0–9
the character codes, instructed codes for memory
keyer contents, and follows are used.
6
• Character’s code— Alphabetical characters
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code Lower edge Higher edge 7
a–z 61–7A — —
8
• Character’s code— Symbols • Data mode with filter width setting
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code Command : 1A 06 9
! 21 # 23
$ 24 % 25 q w
10
& 26 ¥ 5C X X X X
?
’
3F
27
”
`
22
60
00=Data mode OFF 11
01=FIL1
+
:
2B
3A
–
;
2D
3B
02=FIL2 12
03=FIL3
=
>
3D
3E
<
(
3C
28 00=Data mode OFF
13
) 29 [ 5B 01=Data mode 1 (D1)
] 5D { 7B 02=Data mode 2 (D2) 14
} 7D | 7C 03=Data mode 3 (D3)
_ 5F – 7E 15
@ 40
16
Command Set item/Available characters 17
Memory name
1A00
All characters are available. 18
Opening message
1A05 0052 Capital letters, numerals, some symbols (− /
. @) and space are available.
19
CLOCK 2 name
Capital letters, small letters, numerals,
20
1A05 0057 some symbols (! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ /
. , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } ¦ _ – @) and space are 21
available.
158
12 CONTROL COMMAND
D Data content description (continued)
• Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency • Band edge frequency setting

setting Command 02*, 1E 01, 1E 03
Command : 1B 00, 1B 01 q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2
q* w e X X X X X X X X X X X X 2 D X X X X X X X X X X
0 0 X X X X
1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)


Edge number*: 01–30
100Hz digit: 0–2
0.1 Hz digit: 0–9

10 Hz digit: 0–9

1 Hz digit: 0–9
10 MHz digit: 0–6
10 MHz digit: 0–6

100 Hz digit: 0–9
100 Hz digit: 0–9

Fixed digit: 0*
Fixed digit: 0*
Separator (fixed)
10 kHz digit: 0–9
10 kHz digit: 0–9

1 MHz digit: 0–9
1 MHz digit: 0–9

10 Hz digit: 0–9
10 Hz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9
1 kHz digit: 0–9

1 Hz digit: 0–9
1 Hz digit: 0–9
*Not necessary when setting a frequency.
Lower edge Higher edge
* E dge number setting is not necessary with com-

mand 02.
• Memory content setting

Command : 1A 00
q, w e r−i o, !0 !1 !2−!4 !5−!7 !8−@7
X X X X X X X X ... X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ... X X
q, w Memory channel number o, !0 Operating mode setting

0000–0099 : Memory channel 0 to 99 See “• Operating mode.”
0100 : Programmed scan edge P1
0101 : Programmed scan edge P2 !1 Data mode setting
1 byte data (XX)
e Select memory setting !1
00 : OFF
X X
01 : 1
02 : 2 0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: TSQL
03 : 3 0: OFF, 1: DATA 1, 2: DATA 2, 3: DATA 3
q w e !2–!4 Repeater tone frequency setting

X X X X X X !5–!7 Tone squelch frequency setting
See “• Repeater tone/tone squelch setting.”
To program the blank channel, enter “FF” to e after
the memory channel number (q and w). !8–@7 Memory name setting
This completes the memory channel programming. Up to 10 characters.
See “• Codes for memory name, opening message
r–i Operating frequency setting and Clock 2 name contents.”
See “• Operating frequency.”
159
SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS 13
■ General ■ Receiver
• Frequency coverage : (unit: MHz) • Receive system : Double superheterodyne
Receive system
0.030–60.000*1*2 • Intermediate frequencies
Transmit 1st : 64.455 MHz
1.800–1.999*2, 3.500–3.999*2, 2nd : 36 kHz
5.33050* , 5.34650* , 5.36650*3,
3 3
• Sensitivity (typical)
5.37150*3, 5.40350*3, SSB, CW, RTTY : 0.15 µV (1.80–29.99 MHz)*1
7.000–7.300*2, 10.100–10.150*2, (10 dB S/N) BW=2.4 kHz 0.12 µV (50.0–54.0 MHz)*2
14.000–14.350*2, 18.068–18.168*2, AM (10 dB S/N) : 6.3 µV (0.1–1.799 MHz)*1
21.000–21.450*2, 24.890–24.990*2, BW=6 kHz 2 µV (1.80–29.99 MHz)*1
2
28.000–29.700* , 50.000–54.000*2 1.6 µV (50.0–54.0 MHz)*2
*1Some frequency bands are not guaranteed. FM (12 dB SINAD) : 0.5 µV (28.0–29.99 MHz)*1
*2Depending on version. *3USA version only. BW=15 kHz 0.3 µV (50.0–54.0 MHz)*2
1

• Mode : USB, LSB, CW, RTTY, PSK,
*1Pre-amp 1 is ON. *2Pre-amp 2 is ON.
AM, FM • Squelch sensitivity (Pre-amp: ON)
• No. of memory channels : 101 (99 regular, 2 scan edges)
• Antenna connector type : SO-239 × 2 and phono jack
SSB
FM
: Less than 3.2 µV
: Less than 0.3 µV
2
• Temperature range
(RCA; 50 ø impedance)
: 0˚C to +50˚C (+32˚F to +122˚F)
• Selectivity (IF filter shape is set to SHARP.)
SSB (BW: 2.4 kHz) : More than 2.4 kHz/–6 dB 3
• Frequency stability : Less than ±0.5 ppm 5 min. after Less than 3.8 kHz/–60 dB
power ON. (0˚C to +50˚C; +32˚F to CW (BW: 500 Hz) : More than 500 Hz/–6 dB 4
+122˚F) Less than 900 Hz/–60 dB
• Frequency resolution
• Power supply
: 1 Hz
: 13.8 V DC ±15% (negative ground)
RTTY (BW: 350 Hz) : More than 350 Hz/–6 dB
Less than 650 Hz/–60 dB
5
• Power consumption AM (BW: 6 kHz) : More than 6.0 kHz/–6 dB
Transmit : Max. power 23 A Less than 15.0 kHz/–60 dB 6
Receive : Standby 3.0 A FM (BW: 15 kHz) : More than 12.0 kHz/–6 dB
• Dimensions
Max. audio 3.5 A
: 340(W) × 116(H) × 279.3(D) mm • Spurious and image
Less than 20.0 kHz/–60 dB
: More than 70 dB
7
(projections not included) 133⁄8(W) × 49⁄16(H) × 11(D) in rejection ratio (except IF through on 50 MHz band)
• Weight (approx.) : 10.0 kg; 22 lb • AF output power : More than 2.0 W at 10% 8
• ACC 1 connector : 8-pin DIN connector (at 13.8 V DC) distortion with an 8 ø load
• ACC 2 connector
• CI-V connector
: 7-pin DIN connector
: 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8″)
• RIT variable range
• PHONES connector
: ±9.999 kHz
: 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (1⁄4″)
9
• Display : 5.8-inch (diagonal)
TFT color LCD
• External SP connector : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm
(1⁄8″)/8 ø 10
• DSP ANF attenuation : More than 30 dB
(with 1 kHz single tone) 11
■ Transmitter • DSP NR attenuation : More than 6 dB
• Output power (continuously adjustable)

(noise rejection in SSB)
12
SSB/CW/RTTY/FM : Less than 2 to 100 W
AM : Less than 1 to 30 W
■ Antenna tuner 13
• Modulation system
SSB
AM
: Digital PSN modulation
: Digital Low power modulation
• Matching impedance range
HF bands : 16.7 to 150 ø unbalanced
14
FM : Digital Phase modulation (Less than VSWR 3:1)
• Spurious emission 50 MHz band : 20 to 125 ø unbalanced 15
HF bands : Less than –50 dB (Less than VSWR 2.5:1)
50 MHz band
• Carrier suppression
: Less than –63 dB
: More than 40 dB
• Minimum operating input
power
: 8 W (HF bands)
15 W (50MHz band)
16
• Unwanted sideband
suppression
: More than 55 dB • Tuning accuracy
• Insertion loss
: VSWR 1.5:1 or less
: Less than 1.0 dB 17
• ∂TX variable range : ±9.999 kHz (after tuning at RF power 100W)
• Microphone connector : 8-pin connector (600 ø) 18
• ELEC-KEY connector : 3-conductor 6.35(d) mm (1⁄4″)
• KEY connector
• SEND connector
: 3-conductor 6.35(d) mm (1⁄4″)
: Phono jack (RCA) Spurious signals may be displayed on the spectrum scope screen
19
• ALC connector : Phono jack (RCA) regardless of the transceiver’s state (Tx or Rx). They are gener-
ated in the scope circuit. This does not indicate a transceiver mal- 20
function.
All stated specifications are typical and subject to change without 21

notice or obligation.
160
13 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS
■ Options
IC-PW1/EURO HF/50 MHz ALL BAND 1 kW LINEAR AMPLIFIER AH-4 hf automatic antenna tuner
Specially designed to tune a long wire

antenna for HF/50 MHz bands partic-
Full-duty 1 kW linear amplifier including an automatic antenna tuner. Has auto- ularly in portable or mobile operation.
matic tuning and band selection capability. Full break-in (QSK) operation is pos- The “PTT tune” function provides sim-
sible. The amplifier/power supply unit and the remote control unit are separated. ple operation.
• Input power rating: 120 W
PS-126 dc power supply SP-23 external speaker AH-2b antenna element
A 2.5 m long antenna ele-

ment for mobile operation
4 audio filters; headphone jack; can with the AH-4.
connect to 2 transceivers. • F r e q u e n c y c o v e r a g e
• Output voltage : 13.8 V DC • Input impedance: 8 ø 7–54 MHz band with the
• Max. output current : 25 A • Max. input power: 4 W AH-4
HM-36 hand microphone SM-20 desktop microphone SM-50 desktop microphone
Unidirectional, electret microphone for Unidirectional, dynamic microphone for

Hand microphone equipped with [UP]/
base station operation. Includes [UP]/ base station operation. Includes [UP]/
[DOWN] switches.
[DOWN] switches, low cut switch and [DOWN] switches, a low cut switch and
mic gain control. mic gain control.
CT-17 ci-v level converter unit • MB-121 carrying handle

Convenient when carrying the transceiver.
The same as that attached with the transceiver.
Approved Icom optional equipment is designed for optimal performance

when used with an Icom transceiver.
Icom is not responsible for the destruction or damage to an Icom trans-
For remote transceiver control using a ceiver in the event the Icom transceiver is used with equipment that is not
personal computer equipped with an manufactured or approved by Icom.
RS-232C port. You can change fre-
quencies, operating mode, memory
channels, etc., via your computer.
161
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 14
■ General
The IC-7600’s firmware can be updated if desired. By
updating the firmware, new function(s) can be added
and the improvement of performance parameters can
be obtained.
Refer to ■ Preparation (p. 163) and ■ Firmware

The downloaded firmware data (e.g. 7600_110.dat)
update (p. 164) for details.
should be copied to the USB-Memory (in the “IC-
7600” folder) using an available USB port (a USB
Ask your dealer or distributor about how to update the
hub may be required; purchase separately from
firmware if you have no PC.
your PC dealer).
1
2
D Firmware confirmation
The firmware version of the IC-7600 can be confirmed 3
during turning power ON.
• The firmware version appears at the right bottom corner. 4
5
6
7
Firmware version
■ Caution 8
CAUTION: NEVER turn the transceiver power OFF 9
while updating the firmware.
You can turn the transceiver power OFF only when
the transceiver displays that rebooting is required.
10
If you turn the transceiver power OFF, or if a power
failure occurs during updating, the transceiver firm-
11
ware will be corrupted and you will have to send the
transceiver back to the nearest Icom distributor for
12
repair. This type of repair is out of warranty even if
the warranty period is still valid. 13
Recommendation! 14
Backing up the settings and/or memory contents to
the USB-Memory before starting the firmware update 15
is recommended.
Settings and/or memory contents will be lost or 16
returned to default settings when the firmware update
is performed. 17
18
19
20
21
162
14 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
■ Preparation
D Firmware
The latest firmware can be downloaded from our web-
site. Access the following URL to download the latest
firmware.
Information
The downloaded firmware data (e.g. 7600_110.dat)
should be copied to the USB-Memory (in the “IC-7600”
folder) using an available USB port (a USB hub may be
required; purchase separately from your PC dealer).
D File downloading
q Access the following URL.
w Click [Support] button.
e Click “Firmware Updates/Software Downloads” link
then click the firmware file link.
r Click the desired firmware file link in the IC-7600
group.
t Read “Regarding this Download Service” carefully,

then click [AGREE].
Read carefully
Click
y Click [Save] in the displayed File Download dialog.
Click
u Select the desired location in which you want to

save the firmware, then click [Save] in the dis- Select the saving
played File Download dialog. location
• File download starts.
i After the download is completed, extract the file.
• The firmware is compressed in “zip” format, respec-
tively.
• When updating the transceiver using with the USB-
Memory, copy the extracted firmware (e.g. 7600_110. 7600_110.dat
Click
dat) to the USB-Memory IC-7600 folder.
• The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-
7600. (p. 143)
163
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 14
■ Firmware update
The transceiver displays its firmware version informa- FIRM UP / FIRM UP OK SET / USB / CANCEL
tion after turning power ON, if the opening message F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6
screen indication capability is ON. (p. 127)
q Copy the downloaded firmware data into the “IC-

7600” folder of the USB-Memory.
• The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-
7600.
w Insert the USB-Memory into the [USB] (A) connec-
tor on the front panel.
[USB] (A) F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET
e Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi-
function screens, if necessary. / DIR/FILE / 1
r Push [SET] (F-6) to select the set mode menu
screen. 2
t Push [USB] (F-6) to select the USB Memory set
menu. 3
y Push and hold [FIRM UP] (F-3) for 1 sec.
4
5
u Read the displayed precaution carefully.
• Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to scroll the display.
6
• Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel the firmware updating.
7
8
i After you read and understand all of the precau-
tions, push [OK] (F-5). 9
• [OK] (F-5) appears only following the precautions.
• Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel the firmware updating. 10
o Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the firmware 11
file, then push [FIRM UP] (F-4).
12
13
!0 Read the displayed precautions carefully.
14
15
!1 If you agree, push and hold [OK] (F-5) for 1 sec. to
16
start the firmware update.
• Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel the firmware updating. 17
18
!2 While loading the firmware from the USB-Memory, 19
the dialog to the right is displayed.
20
21
164
14 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
■ Firmware update (Continued)
!3 After the firmware loading is completed, the trans-

ceiver automatically starts the update, and the dia-
log at right is displayed.
RWARNING: NEVER turn the IC-7600 power OFF

at this stage.
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!4 When the dialog disappears, the precaution to the

right is displayed.
!5 R ead the precaution carefully, and then push
[OK] (F-5).
• Return to the USB Memory set menu.
!6 Push [POWER] to turn the IC-7600 power OFF,

then ON again.
!7 Depending on the update, one or two dialog boxes

to the right appear in sequence.
RWARNING: NEVER turn the IC-7600 power OFF

at this stage.
The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!8 After the dialog disappears, the firmware updat-

ing is completed and the normal operation screen
appears.
165
CE 15
INSTALLATION NOTES
For amateur base station installations it is recom- In all cases any possible risk depends on the trans-
mended that the forward clearance in front of the an- mitter being activated for long periods. (actual recom-
tenna array is calculated relative to the EIRP (Effec- mendation limits are specified as an average during 6
tive Isotropic Radiated Power). The clearance height minutes) Normally the transmitter is not active for long
below the antenna array can be determined in most periods of time. Some radio licenses will require that a
cases from the RF power at the antenna input termi- timer circuit automatically cuts off the transmitter after
nals. 1–2 minutes etc.
As different exposure limits have been recommended Similarly some modes of transmission, SSB, CW, AM
for different frequencies, a relative table shows a etc. have a lower ‘average’ output power and the as-
guideline for installation considerations. sessed risk is even lower.
Below 30 MHz, the recommended limits are specified Versions of the IC-7600 which display the 1
in terms of V/m or A/m fields as they are likely to fall “CE” symbol on the serial number label,
within the near-field region. Similarly, the antennas comply with the essential requirements of 2
may be physically short in terms of electrical length the European Radio and Telecommunica-
and that the installation will require some antenna tion Terminal Directive 1999/5/EC. 3
matching device which can create local, high intensity
magnetic fields. Analysis of such MF installations is This warning symbol indicates that this 4
best considered in association with published guid- equipment operates in non-harmonised
ance notes such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition
97-01 and its annexes relative to amateur transmitter
frequency bands and/or may be subject to
licensing conditions in the country of use.
5
installations.
The EC recommended limits are almost identical to
Be sure to check that you have the correct
version of this radio or the correct pro-
6
the FCC specified ‘uncontrolled’ limits and tables exist
that show pre-calculated safe distances for different
gramming of this radio, to comply with na-
tional licensing requirement.
7
antenna types for different frequency bands. Further
information can be found at http://www.arrl.org/. • List of Country codes (ISO 3166-1) 8
• Typical amateur radio installation 1
Country
Austria
Codes
AT 18
Country
Liechtenstein
Codes
LI
9
Exposure distance assumes that the predominant ra- 2 Belgium BE 19 Lithuania LT
diation pattern is forward and that radiation vertically 3 Bulgaria BG 20 Luxembourg LU 10
downwards is at unity gain (sidelobe suppression is 4 Croatia HR 21 Malta MT
equal to main lobe gain). This is true of almost every 5 Czech Republic CZ 22 Netherlands NL 11
gain antenna today. Exposed persons are assumed 6 Cyprus CY 23 Norway NO
to be beneath the antenna array and have a typical 7
8
Denmark
Estonia
DK
EE
24
25
Poland
Portugal
PL
PT
12
height of 1.8 m.
13
9 Finland FI 26 Romania RO
10 France FR 27 Slovakia SK
The figures assume the worst case emission of a 11 Germany DE 28 Slovenia SI
constant carrier. 12 Greece GR 29 Spain ES 14
13 Hungary HU 30 Sweden SE
For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power
density limits have been recommended:
14
15
Iceland
Ireland
IS
IE
31
32
Switzerland
Turkey
CH
TR
15
10–50 MHz 2 W/sq m 16
17
Italy
Latvia
IT
LV
33 United Kingdom GB
16
Vertical clearance by EIRP output
1 Watts 2.1 m 17
10 Watts 2.8 m
25 Watts 3.4 m 18
100 Watts 5m
1000 Watts 12 m 19
Forward clearance by EIRP output 20
100 Watts 2m
1000 Watts 6.5 m
10,000 Watts 20 m
21
100,000 Watts 65 m
166
15 CE
DECLARATION
OF CONFORMITY
We Icom Inc. Japan

1-1-32, Kamiminami, Hirano-ku
Osaka 547-0003, Japan
Declare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with the Düsseldorf 23rd Jan. 2009
essential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Place and date of issue
Equipment Directive, 1999/5/EC, and that any applicable Essential Test
Suite measurements have been performed.
Kind of equipment: HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER
Authorized representative name
Type-designation: iC- 7600 Y. Furukawa

General Manager
Version (where applicable):
This compliance is based on conformity with the following harmonised
standards, specifications or documents:
i) EN 301 489-1 v1.6.1 (September 2005)
ii) EN 301 489-15 v1.2.1 (August 2002)
iii) EN 301 783-2 v1.1.1 (September 2000) Signature
iv) EN 60950-1 : 2001
167
MEMO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
168
MEMO
169
MEMO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
170
MEMO
171
MEMO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
172
IC-7600 #03 < Intended Country of Use >
(Europe) AT BE CY CZ DK EE
FI FR DE GR HU IE
IT LV LT LU MT NL
PL PT SK SI ES SE
GB IS LI NO CH BG
RO TR HR

(Europe-1) AT BE CY CZ DK EE
FI FR DE GR HU IE
IT LV LT LU MT NL
PL PT SK SI ES SE
GB IS LI NO CH BG
RO TR HR

(Spain) AT BE CY CZ DK EE
FI FR DE GR HU IE
IT LV LT LU MT NL
PL PT SK SI ES SE
GB IS LI NO CH BG
RO TR HR

(Italy) AT BE CY CZ DK EE
FI FR DE GR HU IE
IT LV LT LU MT NL
PL PT SK SI ES SE
GB IS LI NO CH BG
RO TR HR

(France) AT BE CY CZ DK EE
FI FR DE GR HU IE
IT LV LT LU MT NL
PL PT SK SI ES SE
GB IS LI NO CH BG
RO TR HR
A-6722H-1EX-e
Printed in Japan
© 2009−2010 Icom Inc. 1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan

Instruction Manual: Hf/50 MHZ Transceiver

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual: Hf/50 MHZ Transceiver

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual: Hf/50 MHZ Transceiver

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER

13 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS........... 160−161

14 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE.................... 162−165

TIMER TX RX SPLIT LOCK 1.8 3.5 7 TWIN-PBT

w TRANSMIT TUNER MONITOR

q POWER SWITCH [POWER•TIMER] (p. 30) r ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [ELEC-KEY]

y MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC] !0 RF GAIN CONTROL/SQUELCH CONTROL

■ Front panel (continued)

TIMER TX RX SPLIT LOCK 1.8 3.5 7 TWIN-PBT

MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF

!1 BREAK-IN DELAY CONTROL !3 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCHES

Push Slow When a transverter is in use, [ANT]

MF2 (MULTI-FUNCTION 2 SWITCH)

MF3 (MULTI-FUNCTION 3 SWITCH) MF6 (MULTI-FUNCTION 6 SWITCH)

 he AGC time constant can be set be-

■ Front panel (continued)

TIMER TX RX SPLIT LOCK 1.8 3.5 7 TWIN-PBT

MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF

@1 MODE SWITCHES @5 VOICE MEMORY PLAYBACK SWITCH [PLAY]

@3 EXIT/SET SWITCH [EXIT/SET]

@4 VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH [REC] (p. 91)

■ Front panel (continued)

TIMER TX RX SPLIT LOCK 1.8 3.5 7 TWIN-PBT

PHONES BAL NR CHANGE

#0 TRANSMIT INDICATOR [TX] #7 SPLIT SWITCH [SPLIT] (p. 88)

#9 PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN-PBT] ✔ What is the notch function?

$3 CLEAR SWITCH [CLEAR] (pgs. 73, 87) 4

■ Front panel (continued)

TIMER TX RX SPLIT LOCK 1.8 3.5 7 TWIN-PBT

$6 MEMORY UP/DOWN SWITCHES [∫]/[√] (p. 99) %0 VFO/MEMORY SWITCH [VFO/MEMO]

%3 CW PITCH CONTROL [CW PITCH]

!3 SEND CONTROL JACK [SEND] (p. 18)

q S/RF METER (pgs. 35, 126) w IF FILTER INDICATOR (p. 76)

r BANDWIDTH INDICATOR (p. 75)

t SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR (p. 75)

u BANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR

o RTTY TUNING INDICATOR @2 NOTCH INDICATOR (p. 83)

!7 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE 12

@1 RIT/∂TX SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR

■ Screen menu arrangement

• PSK decoder screen (PSK mode; p. 54)

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-3

*Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is displayed.

MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF

A straight key can be used MICROPHONES (p. 23)

GROUND Use the heaviest gauge STRAIGHT KEY

Grounding prevents electri-

MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF

Connect a USB type PC keyboard

for direct RTTY/PSK operation, as

Connect a linear amplifier, 14

for VHF, UHF or other

[METER] [USB] (B)

Be sure to connect the USB-Memory correctly.

A USB keyboard* or a USB hub* can also be

* U SB-Memory, USB keyboard and USB hub are not

y MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC] !0 RF GAIN CONTROL/SQUELCH CONTROL

!1 BREAK-IN DELAY CONTROL !3 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCHES

Push Slow When a transverter is in use, [ANT]

he AGC time constant can be set be-

@1 MODE SWITCHES @5 VOICE MEMORY PLAYBACK SWITCH [PLAY]

@4 VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH [REC] (p. 91)

#9 PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN-PBT] ✔ What is the notch function?

$6 MEMORY UP/DOWN SWITCHES [∫]/[√] (p. 99) %0 VFO/MEMORY SWITCH [VFO/MEMO]

* U SB-Memory, USB keyboard and USB hub are not

esetting CLEARS all programmed contents in

OTE: When entering the quick tuning step set

q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function OFF. TS

➥ Push [1/4] (MF7) to toggle the 1⁄4 tuning function

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close any multi-

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to return to the nor-

➥ Push [SPEECH/LOCK] to announce the currently

* The S-meter level and operating mode announcements

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to return to the nor- SET

q During the CW mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the

q During the CW mode, push [EXIT/SET] several KEYER / 001